Sunteți pe pagina 1din 184

GENSYS 2.

0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation


C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

1








Core unit for all-in-one
Genset control and paralleling unit
with integrated plc








CRE Technology believes that all information provided herein is correct and reliable and reserves the right
to update at any time. CRE Technology does not assume any responsibility for its use. E & O E.
Technical Documentation

GENSYS CORE

Part Number:
A53Z1 B-EN
Last Update:
April 25
th
2011
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

2



CRE Technology

130 Alle Charles-Victor Naudin
Zone des Templiers Sophia Antipolis
06410 BIOT
FRANCE

Phone: +33 492 38 86 82
Fax: +33 492 38 86 83

Website: www.cretechnology.com
Email: info@cretechnology.com


NOTE:
Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to be performed before installing,
operating, or servicing this equipment. Apply all plant and safety instructions and precautions. Failure to
follow instructions can cause personal injury and/or property damage.
Motors, turbines and any other type of generator must be equipped with protections (overspeed, high
temperature, low pressure,depending on the power plant).
Any changes of the normal use of the equipment can cause human and material damage.

For further information, please contact your CRE technology distributor or the After-Sales Service Team.
All CRE Technology products are delivered with one year warranty, and if necessary we will be happy to
come on site for product commissioning or troubleshooting. The company also provide specific trainings
on our products and softwares.

Technical Support: +33 492 38 86 86 (office hours: 8.30AM-12AM / 2PM-6PM)
Mail: support@cretechnology.com
SKYPE: support-cretechnology.com

INFORMATION
You can download the most up-to-date version of this documentation and different other documentations
relating to GENSYS 2.0 Core on our web site:
http://www.cretechnology.com/

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

3

Date Version Comments By
August 23th 2010 A Derived from GENSYS documentation. Starting point. XDH
April 25
th
2011 B Specific Applications dedicated for Gensys 2.0 Core TD

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

4

Table content

TABLE CONTENT ............................................................................................................................................................... 4
FIGURES CONTENT ............................................................................................................................................................ 7
TABLES CONTENT .............................................................................................................................................................. 9
1 OVERVIEW............................................................................................................................................................. 10
1.1 EUROPEAN UNION DIRECTIVE COMPLIANCE CE ......................................................................................................... 10
1.2 ENVIRONMENT .................................................................................................................................................. 10
1.3 CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................................................................................................... 10
1.4 APPLICATION AND CONNECTION ............................................................................................................................. 11
1.5 REAR PANEL - CONNECTORS .................................................................................................................................. 13
1.6 REMOTE CONTROL USING A PC (ETHERNET CONNECTION) ............................................................................................ 19
2 OPERATING MODES .............................................................................................................................................. 24
2.1 MANUAL MODE ................................................................................................................................................. 24
2.2 AUTO MODE ..................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.3 TEST MODE ....................................................................................................................................................... 25
2.4 SEMI AUTO MODE .............................................................................................................................................. 25
3 START SEQUENCE .................................................................................................................................................. 26
4 PREDEFINED CONFIGURATIONS ............................................................................................................................ 27
4.1 SINGLE GENERATOR IN CHANGE-OVER MODE ............................................................................................................. 27
4.2 SINGLE GENERATOR IN NO-CHANGE-OVER MODE ........................................................................................................ 28
4.3 GENERATORS PARALLELING WITH DIGITAL BUS ........................................................................................................... 29
4.4 GENERATORS PARALLELING WITH GENSYS 2.0 CORE AND PARALLEL LINE MODULES ........................................................... 30
4.5 MULTIPLE GENERATORS WITH STATIC PARALLELING ..................................................................................................... 30
4.6 SINGLE GENERATOR PARALLELED WITH MAINS ............................................................................................................ 32
4.7 POWER PLANT PARALLELED WITH MAINS USING MASTER 2.0 OR GCR ........................................................................... 36
4.8 POWER PLANT PARALLELED WITH SEVERAL MAINS USING MASTER 2.0 OR GCR ................................................................ 36
5 INSTALLING AND COMMISSIONING A GENSYS 2.0 CORE APPLICATION ................................................................. 38
5.1 MINIMUM WIRING DIAGRAM ................................................................................................................................ 38
5.2 COMPLETE WIRING DIAGRAM ................................................................................................................................ 39
5.3 BEFORE COMMISSIONING (BEFORE GOING ON SITE) ..................................................................................................... 41
5.4 DURING COMMISSIONING ..................................................................................................................................... 41
6 DEDICATED I/O LINES ............................................................................................................................................ 45
6.1 SPEED GOVERNOR INTERFACE ................................................................................................................................ 45
6.2 SPEED AND VOLTAGE CONTROL WITH CONTACTS / PULSES ............................................................................................ 49
6.3 ANALOGUE AVR (AUTO VOLTAGE REGULATOR) CONTROL ............................................................................................ 52
6.4 RELAY OUTPUTS ................................................................................................................................................. 54
6.5 CRANK / FUEL / STARTER 2 / STARTER 3 FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................... 56
6.6 WATER PREHEAT / PRE-LUBRICATION / PRE-GLOW FUNCTIONS ...................................................................................... 57
6.7 AIR FAN ........................................................................................................................................................... 58
6.8 FUEL FILLING / COOLANT FILLING / OIL FILLING .......................................................................................................... 59
6.9 ANALOGUE LOAD SHARE LINES ............................................................................................................................... 61
6.10 WATCHDOG OUTPUT........................................................................................................................................... 61
7 I/O LINES ............................................................................................................................................................... 62
7.1 DIGITAL INPUT ................................................................................................................................................... 62
7.2 DIGITAL OUTPUTS ............................................................................................................................................... 66
7.3 ANALOGUE INPUT ............................................................................................................................................... 70
8 PROTECTIONS ........................................................................................................................................................ 74
8.1 DISABLE ........................................................................................................................................................... 74
8.2 GENERATOR ELECTRICAL FAULT .............................................................................................................................. 74
8.3 MAINS ELECTRICAL FAULT ..................................................................................................................................... 74
8.4 ALARM ............................................................................................................................................................ 74
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

5

8.5 FAULT (SOFT SHUT DOWN) ................................................................................................................................... 74
8.6 SECURITY (HARD SHUTDOWN)............................................................................................................................... 74
8.7 HELP + FAULT (SOFT SHUT DOWN) ......................................................................................................................... 74
8.8 HELP + GEN. ELECTRICAL FAULT ............................................................................................................................. 74
9 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................................................................... 75
9.1 LOAD SHARING USING INTEGRAL (DE-DROOPING)........................................................................................................ 75
9.2 OPERATOR CONTROLLED RETURN TO MAINS .............................................................................................................. 77
9.3 MAINS & GENERATOR ELECTRICAL FAULT OPTIONS ..................................................................................................... 77
9.4 GENERATOR ELECTRICAL FAULT .............................................................................................................................. 80
9.5 GENSYS 2.0 CORE WITH EXTERNAL AUTOMATIC START MODULE ................................................................................... 80
9.6 REMOTE START UPON EXTERNAL PULSE .................................................................................................................... 81
9.7 SAFETY INHIBITIONS ............................................................................................................................................ 82
9.8 USE OF BSM II WITH GENSYS 2.0 CORE ................................................................................................................ 83
9.9 GENSYS 2.0 CORE WITH TEM COMPACT ................................................................................................................ 86
9.10 PRESETTING COUNTERS / G59 PARAMETERS (ACCESS LEVEL -1) ..................................................................................... 88
9.11 SCADA ............................................................................................................................................................. 88
9.12 HOW TO SET A GPID........................................................................................................................................... 89
9.13 AUTOMATIC LOAD / UNLOAD................................................................................................................................. 90
9.14 HEAVY CONSUMER (MARINE SEQUENCE) .................................................................................................................. 92
9.15 NON ESSENTIAL CONSUMER TRIP (MARINE SEQUENCE) ................................................................................................. 94
TO DEACTIVATE THE OUTPUTS, IT IS NECESSARY TO RESET THE ALARM E2729 ON THE FRONT PANEL....................... 96
9.16 PHASE OFFSET (DYN11 AND OTHER) ....................................................................................................................... 96
9.17 120 THREE PHASE AND 180 TWO PHASE SYSTEMS ................................................................................................... 97
10 TEXT FILE & PLC ..................................................................................................................................................... 98
10.1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................. 98
10.2 VARIABLE NAMING ............................................................................................................................................. 98
10.3 TEXT FILE DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................................ 99
10.4 PLC PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE .......................................................................................................................... 106
10.5 VARIABLES ...................................................................................................................................................... 107
10.6 SYNTAX EXAMPLES ............................................................................................................................................ 108
10.7 GENSYS 1.0 GENSYS 2.0 CORE COMPATIBILITY .................................................................................................. 110
11 COMMUNICATION .............................................................................................................................................. 112
11.1 CAN BUS GOOD PRACTICES ................................................................................................................................. 112
CAN BUS CABLE: .......................................................................................................................................................... 112
MAXIMAL LENGTH OF A CAN BUS:............................................................................................................................... 113
COMMUNICATION SPEED OF GENSYS 2.0 CORE CAN BUS: ........................................................................................... 113
11.2 COM1: INTER GENSYS 2.0 CORE CAN BUS .......................................................................................................... 113
11.3 COM2: CAN PROTOCOLS (CANOPEN, J1939, MTU MDEC): .................................................................................. 123
11.4 COM3: USB .................................................................................................................................................. 137
11.5 COM4: ETHERNET ........................................................................................................................................ 137
11.6 COM5: MODBUS RTU ON SERIAL PORT RS485.................................................................................................... 137
11.7 COM6: SD CARD............................................................................................................................................. 139
12 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................................................................................ 143
13 MENU OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................................ 145
13.1 MENU INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 145
13.2 DISPLAY MENU .............................................................................................................................................. 145
13.3 CONFIGURATION MENU ................................................................................................................................ 151
13.4 BASIC CONFIGURATION MENU ............................................................................................................................ 152
13.5 ENHANCED CONFIGURATION MENU ...................................................................................................................... 157
13.6 SYSTEM MENU .............................................................................................................................................. 169
13.7 DEDICATED SCREENS ......................................................................................................................................... 173
14 USEFUL INFORMATION........................................................................................................................................ 176
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

6

15 VARIABLES .......................................................................................................................................................... 178
16 PRECAUTIONS ..................................................................................................................................................... 179
17 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................................ 181
17.1 OPTIONS ........................................................................................................................................................ 181
17.2 ACCESSORIES................................................................................................................................................... 182
18 CRE TECHNOLOGY ............................................................................................................................................... 183


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

7

Figures content
Figure 1 Multi-control HMI ........................................................................................................................................... 11
Figure 2 HMI redundancy ............................................................................................................................................. 12
Figure 3 - Rear panel ...................................................................................................................................................... 13
Figure 4 Typical menu .................................................................................................................................................. 22
Figure 5 Typical configuration page ............................................................................................................................. 23
Figure 6 - Typical start sequence for fuel engines ............................................................................................................ 26
Figure 7 - Power plant in change-over mode without paralleling ..................................................................................... 27
Figure 8 - Typical sequence in change over mode ............................................................................................................ 28
Figure 9 - Power plant in change over without paralleling ............................................................................................... 28
Figure 10 - Power plant with several generators ............................................................................................................. 29
Figure 11 - Generator paralleling with parallel lines ........................................................................................................ 30
Figure 12 - Static paralleling with 4 generators coupled together in emergency situation ................................................ 31
Figure 13 - Example with 4 generators coupled together in emergency situation. ............................................................ 31
Figure 14 - Paralleling with mains ................................................................................................................................... 32
Figure 15 - Typical sequence in No Break CO mode .......................................................................................................... 33
Figure 16 - Typical sequence in permanent mode ............................................................................................................ 34
Figure 17 - GCR GENSYS 2.0 Core wiring diagram ....................................................................................................... 35
Figure 18 - Power plant paralleling with mains................................................................................................................ 36
Figure 19 - Power plant paralleling with several mains .................................................................................................... 36
Figure 20 - Interconnection of all battery negatives ......................................................................................................... 40
Figure 21 - Speed output ................................................................................................................................................. 45
Figure 22 Connexion avec un EFC Cummins .......................................................................................................... 48
Figure 23 - PWM dynamic ............................................................................................................................................... 48
Figure 24 Caterpillar PEEC and ADEM connections ........................................................................................................ 49
Figure 25 - Speed and voltage control with Contacts / Pulses .......................................................................................... 49
Figure 26 Speed and voltage control pulses .................................................................................................................. 51
Figure 27 - Voltage output .............................................................................................................................................. 52
Figure 28 - Connections for water preheat, pre lubrication and pre glow ......................................................................... 57
Figure 29 - Connection for air fans .................................................................................................................................. 58
Figure 30 - Connections for filling .................................................................................................................................... 59
Figure 31 - Fuel filling diagram ....................................................................................................................................... 60
Figure 32 - Wiring parallel lines ...................................................................................................................................... 61
Figure 33 - Change over with one digital input programmed as "Mains electrical fault" ................................................... 78
Figure 34 - Permanent mains paralleling with one digital input programmed as "Mains electrical fault" .......................... 78
Figure 35 - Permanent mains paralleling with one digital input programmed as "Mains electrical fault" .......................... 79
Figure 36 - Permanent mains paralleling with one input as "Mains electrical fault" ......................................................... 79
Figure 37 - Permanent mains paralleling and generator electrical fault ........................................................................... 80
Figure 38 - Wiring GENSYS 2.0 Core Auto Start Module .............................................................................................. 80
Figure 39 Wiring GENSYS 2.0 Core to BSM II ................................................................................................................. 83
Figure 40 - Wiring GENSYS 2.0 Core TEM ................................................................................................................... 86
Figure 41 - Typical GPID controller .................................................................................................................................. 89
Figure 42 Automatic load/unload sequence ................................................................................................................. 90
Figure 43 - Automatic load/unload arbitration ................................................................................................................ 91
Figure 44 - Heavy consumer validation............................................................................................................................ 92
Figure 45 - Heavy Consumer Control with active power analysis ...................................................................................... 93
Figure 46 - Heavy Consumer Control with number of gensets analysis ............................................................................. 93
Figure 47 - Configuration of the heavy consumer confirmation output............................................................................. 93
Figure 48 - Non essential consumer trip settings ............................................................................................................. 94
Figure 49 - Non essential consumer trip alarm (1) ........................................................................................................... 95
Figure 50 - Non essential consumer trip alarm (2) ........................................................................................................... 95
Figure 51 - Non essential consumer trip output setting .................................................................................................... 95
Figure 52 - Non essential consumer trip timers ................................................................................................................ 96
Figure 53 - Non essential consumer trip diagram ............................................................................................................ 96
Figure 54 Phase offset example .................................................................................................................................... 97
Figure 55 CAN bus wiring ........................................................................................................................................... 112
Figure 56 - CAN Bus wiring............................................................................................................................................ 114
Figure 57 - GENSYS 2.0 Core GENSYS 2.0 Core .......................................................................................................... 114
Figure 58 - GENSYS 2.0 Core GENSYS 2.0 Core GENSYS 2.0 Core ................................................................... 115
Figure 59 - Mobile generator sets ................................................................................................................................. 115
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

8

Figure 60 - Connecting J6 to broadcast variables ........................................................................................................... 119
Figure 61 - Connecting Magnetic pick up for speed broadcast ....................................................................................... 119
Figure 62 - CAN bus inhibition schematic (example) ...................................................................................................... 122
Figure 63 - Modular remote CANopen I/O extension module ......................................................................................... 123
Figure 64 - CANopen coupler wiring .............................................................................................................................. 124
Figure 65 MDEC Screens ............................................................................................................................................ 130
Figure 66 Virtual input screen .................................................................................................................................... 131
Figure 67 - Wiring diagram for Volvo EMS2 ................................................................................................................... 136
Figure 68 - GENSYS 2.0 Core GENSYS 2.0 Core GENSYS 2.0 Core (MODBUS) .................................................. 138
Figure 69 Generator global view ................................................................................................................................ 146
Figure 70 Mains/Busbars global view ......................................................................................................................... 147
Figure 71 Synchroscope ............................................................................................................................................. 148
Figure 72 Engine meters ............................................................................................................................................ 150
Figure 73 GPID factory setting ................................................................................................................................... 155
Figure 74 Cos phi PID ................................................................................................................................................. 155
Figure 75 kVAR shar. gain .......................................................................................................................................... 156
Figure 76 Timers ........................................................................................................................................................ 158
Figure 77 - kW sharing GPI ........................................................................................................................................... 160
Figure 78 P=const PI .................................................................................................................................................. 160
Figure 79 Synchro volt PID ......................................................................................................................................... 161
Figure 80 Synchroscope frequency & phase PID .......................................................................................................... 162
Figure 81 Modification by variable number ................................................................................................................ 166
Figure 82 Com ports................................................................................................................................................... 171
Figure 83 Compilation result screen ........................................................................................................................... 173
Figure 84 Download screen ........................................................................................................................................ 173
Figure 85 Fault screen ................................................................................................................................................ 174
Figure 86 Information screen ..................................................................................................................................... 175
Figure 87 Speed regulation details ............................................................................................................................. 176
Figure 88 Voltage regulation details ........................................................................................................................... 177
Figure 89 - Several generators warning ......................................................................................................................... 179
Figure 90 - One generator with mains warning ............................................................................................................. 179
Figure 91 - Standard cables........................................................................................................................................... 182
Figure 92 - Access to CRE Technology ............................................................................................................................ 183
Figure 93 - CRE Technology distributors ........................................................................................................................ 184

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

9

Tables content
Table 1 - COM1 pin out ................................................................................................................................................... 17
Table 2 - COM2 pin out ................................................................................................................................................... 17
Table 3 - COM4 pin out ................................................................................................................................................... 18
Table 4 - COM5 pin out ................................................................................................................................................... 18
Table 5 - Inputs/Outputs description ............................................................................................................................... 18
Table 6 - Typical basic change over configuration............................................................................................................ 27
Table 7- Typical no change over basic configuration ........................................................................................................ 29
Table 8 - Typical basic multi Generator configuration ...................................................................................................... 29
Table 9 - Typical basic configuration for GENSYS 2.0 Core with parallel line modules ....................................................... 30
Table 10 - Typical basic mains paralleling configuration .................................................................................................. 33
Table 11 - Paralleling with mains configuration ............................................................................................................... 35
Table 12 - GENSYS 2.0 Core /GCR configuration .............................................................................................................. 35
Table 13 - Power plant paralleling with several mains configuration................................................................................ 37
Table 14 - Speed governor parameters ............................................................................................................................ 47
Table 15 - PWM parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 48
Table 16 - AVR parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 53
Table 17 - Breaker control configuration ......................................................................................................................... 55
Table 18 - Fuel/cooling/oil filling parameters .................................................................................................................. 59
Table 19 - Input parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 62
Table 20 - Input validity domain ...................................................................................................................................... 63
Table 21 - Input direction domain ................................................................................................................................... 63
Table 22 - Input functions ............................................................................................................................................... 66
Table 23: Oil pressure calibration points ......................................................................................................................... 71
Table 24: Water Temp calibration points ........................................................................................................................ 71
Table 25 - Wiring GENSYS 2.0 Core Auto Start Module................................................................................................ 81
Table 26 - Wiring GENSYS 2.0 Core TEM ..................................................................................................................... 87
Table 27- Label definition bloc ...................................................................................................................................... 100
Table 28 - Custom logo labels ....................................................................................................................................... 100
Table 29 - Valid units and accuracy codes ..................................................................................................................... 102
Table 30 - Variables with customizable unit/accuracy values ......................................................................................... 104
Table 31 Available instructions ................................................................................................................................... 107
Table 32 DB9 pin out.................................................................................................................................................. 112
Table 33 - Broadcast variables sent over inter GENSYS 2.0 CAN bus ............................................................................... 117
Table 34 Broadcast variables received by BROADCAST DATA from inter GENSYS 2.0 Family CAN bus........................... 118
Table 35 - CAN bus inhibition variables ......................................................................................................................... 121
Table 36 - CAN bus inhibition parameters ..................................................................................................................... 123
Table 37 - CANopen input and output variables............................................................................................................. 125
Table 38 - CANopen configuration example................................................................................................................... 126
Table 39 - MDEC connection ......................................................................................................................................... 127
Table 40 - Important parameters .................................................................................................................................. 128
Table 41 - J1939 message actions (protections) ............................................................................................................. 133
Table 42 - COM5 pin out ............................................................................................................................................... 138
Table 43 - Power plant configuration ............................................................................................................................ 152
Table 44 - Breaker settings ........................................................................................................................................... 159
Table 45 - Screensaver modes ....................................................................................................................................... 170

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

10

1 Overview
1.1 European Union Directive Compliance CE
The EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) deals with electromagnetic emissions and immunity. This product is tested by
applying the standards, in whole or in part, which are documented in the following technical construction file:
CEM 2004/108/EC, which replaces directive CEM (89/336/EEC) relative to electromagnetic emissions as from
July 20th 2009.
This product is developed to respect harmonized norms:
EN 55099:2009
EN 55099:2010
EN 55088:2008
2006/95/EC (replaced directive 73/23/EEC since January 16th 2007).
SAE J1939/71, /73, /31
Other norms:
EN 61326-1: 2006 (Industrial location)
EN 55011
EN 61000-3-2
EN 61000-3-3

Note: This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference. The
user is responsible for taking the necessary precautions.

1.2 Environment
Temperature
Operating: 0 to 55C
Storage: -30 to +70C

Humidity: 5 to 95%

Tropic proof circuits for normal operation in humid conditions.
IP 20 protection

1.3 Characteristics
Size 248x197x57mm (9.76x7.76x2.24in)
Weight 1.0kg (2.2oz)


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

11

1.4 Application and connection
GENSYS 2.0 CORE can be connected to the RDM 2.0
GENSYS 2.0 CORE is a Generator management module
Several power plants possibilities
Same mainboard as the GENSYS 2.0 Family

The GENSYS 2.0 CORE can control a single or a multiple generating sets power plant. You can combine this
module with one or more RDM 2.0 remote display.



Multi-control HMI:
A single RDM 2.0 can control up to 14 GENSYS 2.0 CORE


Figure 1 Multi-control HMI





RDM 2.O
COM 7
GENSYS 2.O Core
COM 4
Ethernet
crossover
cable
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

12

HMI redundancy:
up to 4 RDM 2.0 by GENSYS CORE



Figure 2 HMI redundancy





















RDM 2.O
COM 7
GENSYS 2.O
Core
COM 4
Patch cable
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

13

1.5 Rear panel - Connectors
1.5.1 Overview

Figure 3 - Rear panel




GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

14

1.5.2 Inputs/Outputs

Pin nb Description Terminal
capacity
(mm /
AWG)
Comment
A1 Crank relay out
Output 6
2.5 / 12 Supplied via emergency stop input at battery positive
voltage; can also be used as configurable relay output.
240 V AC, 5 Amps max. Details in 6.4.2
A2 Fuel relay out
Output 7
2.5 / 12 Supplied via emergency stop input at battery positive
voltage; can also be used as configurable relay output.
240 V AC, 5 Amps max. Details in 6.4.2
A3 Emergency stop 2.5 / 12 To battery positive, normally closed; direct supply to
crank and fuel relay outputs.
B1 Generator N 2.5 / 12 Not necessarily connected: if not connected, GENSYS
2.0 Core will calculate a virtual neutral voltage.
B2 Generator L1 2.5 / 12 Generator voltage measurement.
100 to 480 VAC line to line. Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz.
These lines must be protected externally with 100 mA /
600 VAC fuses.
B3 Generator L2 2.5 / 12
B4 Generator L3 2.5 / 12
B5 Mains L1 2.5 / 12 Mains voltage measurement.
100 to 480 VAC line to line. Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz.
These lines must be protected externally with 100 mA /
600 VAC fuses.
B6 Mains L2 2.5 / 12
B7 Mains L3 2.5 / 12
C1 to
C5
Output 1 to 5 2.5 / 12 <350 mA. Over current protected. Reactive load.
Each output can be configured with a specific function
or programmed with an equation, see details in 7.2.1
C5 can also be used as a watchdog output (contact CRE
Technology for more info).
D1 Generator I1- 2.5 / 12 Generator current measurement 0 to 5 Amps.
Maximum rating: 15 Amps during 10s.
1V AC consumption.
External current transformer is normally used.
D2 Generator I1+ 2.5 / 12
D3 Generator I2- 2.5 / 12
D4 Generator I2+ 2.5 / 12
D5 Generator I3- 2.5 / 12
D6 Generator I3+ 2.5 / 12
D7 Not connected 2.5 / 12
E1 Mains open breaker 2.5 / 12 Two configurable relays with one in common, one for
closing, and one for opening. 240 V AC, 5 Amps.
Isolated contact. Details in 6.4.1
E2 Mains close breaker 2.5 / 12
E3 Mains common 2.5 / 12
E4 Bus bar open breaker 2.5 / 12 Two configurable relays with one in common, one for
closing, and one for opening. 240 V AC, 5 Amps.
Isolated contact. Details in 6.4.1
E5 Bus bar close breaker 2.5 / 12
E6 Bus bar common 2.5 / 12
F1 Engine meas. 1- 2.5 / 12
(shielded)
0 to 10 kOhms resistive sensors with programmable
gain. Details in 7.3
F2 Engine meas. 1+ 2.5 / 12
(shielded)
F3 Engine meas. 2- 2.5 / 12
(shielded)
0 to 10 kOhms resistive sensors with programmable
gain. All Details can be found in 7.3
F4 Engine meas. 2+ 2.5 / 12
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

15

(shielded)
F5 Shield 2.5 / 12 Must be used to protect shielded signals.
F6 Water temp meas. - 2.5 / 12
(shielded)
0 to 400 Ohms resistive sensors. Details in 7.3
F7 Water temp meas. + 2.5 / 12
(shielded)
F8 Oil pressure meas. - 2.5 / 12
(shielded)
0 to 400 Ohms resistive sensors. Details can be found in
7.3
F9 Oil pressure meas. + 2.5 / 12
(shielded)
G1 20 mA + 2.5 / 12
(shielded)
10 V (20 kOhms input) or 20 mA (50 Ohms input).
Used as Mains power input measurement with single
generator.
Used as synchronization input from GCR External
analogue synchronizer (ex: GCR terminal 42 or Master
2.0 by parallel lines) when several generators parallel
with mains.
G2 Shield 2.5 / 12
G3 20 mA - 2.5 / 12
(shielded)
G4 Parallel. - 2.5 / 12
(shielded)
5V (10KOhms) compatible parallel lines.
Load sharing and power set level (kW only).
Compatibility with traditional analogue load share lines
(often called Parallel Lines).
Compatibility with Wheatstone bridge.
Only used if GCR or old ILS
Isolated. Details in 6.9
G5 Shield 2.5 / 12
G6 Parallel. + 2.5 / 12
(shielded)
G7 Pickup - 2.5 / 12 50 Hz to 10 kHz. Maximum voltage: 40VAC
Used for speed regulation, crank drop out and over-
speed (see Cautions in 16).
If not wired, the speed measurement can be made by
the alternator voltage. But Pickup is recommended.
Details in speed settings 6.1.1.
G8 Pickup + 2.5 / 12
G9 Speed out + 2.5 / 12 G9: 10 V analogue outputs to speed governor.
G11: 10V reference input from speed governor (ESG)
Compatibility with most speed governors. Details in
6.1.1
G10 Shield 2.5 / 12
G11 Speed ref 2.5 / 12
H1 Not connected 2.5 / 12 Analogue output 5V isolated.
Automatic voltage regulator (AVR) control. Compatible
with most regulators. Details in 6.3
H2 AVR out + 2.5 / 12
H3 Shield 2.5 / 12
H4 AVR out - 2.5 / 12
J1 Mains breaker in 2.5 / 12 Digital input with 10 kOhms pull-up.
Dedicated input for mains breaker feedback.
Accepts NO or NC contact to 0V.
Not isolated.
J2 Gen breaker in 2.5 / 12 Digital input with 10 kOhms pull-up.
Dedicated input for generator breaker feedback.
Accepts NO or NC contact to 0V.
Not isolated.
J3 Remote start/stop 2.5 / 12 Digital input with 10 kOhms pull-up.
Dedicated input for remote start/stop request in Auto
mode.
Accepts NO or NC contact to 0V.
Not isolated.
J4 Oil pressure
Spare input
2.5 / 12 Digital input with 10 kOhms pull-up.
Default factory setting is input for oil pressure fault.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

16

This sensor is needed to start the engine whatever the
mode.
Accepts NO or NC contact to 0V.
Not isolated. Can be programmed as a spare input.
Details in 7.1
J5 Water temp
Spare input
2.5 / 12 Digital input with 10 kOhms pull-up.
Default factory setting is input for water temperature
fault.
Accepts NO or NC contact to 0V.
Not isolated. Can be programmed as a spare input.
Details in 7.1
J6 to
J15
Spare Input
1 to 10
2.5 / 12 Digital inputs with 10 kOhms pull-up.
10 inputs can be configured with a specific function or
programmed with PLC equations.
Accepts NO or NC contact to 0V.
Not isolated. Details in 7.1
K1 Power Tank 2.5 / 12 Used for 12V power supply backup during crank time.
An externally supplied capacitor can be connected
externally between ground and this line for better
tolerance to power drop. A value of 1F per 50S is a
good value. Thus, 47,000F will add a 50ms delay to
power down. Can be adjusted. More is better.
K2 Power supply + 2.5 / 12 9 to 40 V, 10 Watt consumption (without actuator).
Polarity inversion protection.
Note:
The "Power supply -" must be wired from the speed
governor via 4 mm wires. See "state of the art" rules
wiring diagram.
External 5 Amp / 40 VDC fuse recommended.
K3 Power supply - 2.5 / 12
K4 PWM output 2.5 / 12 500 Hz PWM output.
Compatible with Caterpillar and Perkins PWM
controlled units. 0-5V protected against short-circuits to
0V. Details in 6.1.2
L1 Bus/Mains I3+ 2.5 / 12 Bus/Mains current measurement.
1 to 5 Amps. Maximum rating: 15 Amps during 10s.
1VA consumption.
External current transformer is normally used.
L2 Bus/Mains I3- 2.5 / 12
L3 Bus/Mains I2+ 2.5 / 12
L4 Bus/Mains I2- 2.5 / 12
L5 Bus/Mains I1+ 2.5 / 12
L6 Bus/Mains I1- 2.5 / 12
COM1 CAN1 inter GENSYS 2.0
Core
Male DB9
(shielded)
Isolated CAN bus.
Proprietary protocol to communicate with other
GENSYS 2.0 Core /MASTER 2.0 units and share
data/information.
Details in 11.2
SHIELD SHIELD
PIN 1 NC
PIN 2 CAN-L
PIN 3 GROUND-1
PIN 4 NC
PIN 5 GROUND-2
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

17

PIN 6 GROUND-1
PIN 7 CAN-H
PIN 8 NC
PIN 9 NC

Table 1 - COM1 pin out
COM2 CAN2 options
J1939
CANopen
MTU MDEC
Male DB9
(shielded)
Isolated CAN bus (125 kb/s factory setting).
See details in 11.3.
Used to communicate with remote I/O (see remote I/O
CANopen chapter 11.3.1) and J1939 electronic
calculator (electronic engines): details in or MTU
protocol (electronic MDEC engine): details in 11.3.2
SHIELD SHIELD
PIN 1 NC
PIN 2 CAN-L
PIN 3 GROUND-1
PIN 4 NC
PIN 5 GROUND-2
PIN 6 GROUND-1
PIN 7 CAN-H
PIN 8 NC
PIN 9 NC

Table 2 - COM2 pin out
COM3 USB USB
Type B
High Quality
GENSYS 2.0 Core with firmware v2.00 (or later) :
This port is replaced by Ethernet communication.

GENSYS 2.0 Core with firmware v1.xx :
Type B standard USB connector. Use a standard USB A
to B cable to connect with PC.
Used for configuration, parameters, file downloading
and uploading. Uses TCP/IP protocol to communicate
with modem emulation.
Not to be used while engine is running.
Isolated. Details in 11.4
COM4 Ethernet RJ45 CAT5 Standard RJ45 ETHERNET connector.
Isolated. Uses TCP/IP protocol to communicate with
external world. Details in 11.5
PIN 1 Tx pair
PIN 2 Tx pair
PIN 3 Rx pair
PIN 4 NC
PIN 5 NC
PIN 6 Rx pair
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

18

PIN 7 NC
PIN 8 NC

Table 3 - COM4 pin out
COM5 RS485
MODBUS RTU
Male DB9
(shielded)
4800, 9600 or 19200 bps.
Used to communicate with SCADA.
MODBUS RTU slave. Read (04 and 03) and write (06 and
16) functions, 2 wires.
Isolated. Detail in 11.6.
SHIELD SHIELD
PIN 1 NC
PIN 2 NC
PIN 3 GROUND
PIN 4 GROUND
PIN 5 B
PIN 6 A
PIN 7 NC
PIN 8 NC
PIN 9 GROUND

Table 4 - COM5 pin out
COM6 Memory slot SD Memory slot used for extensions. Details in 11.7
Table 5 - Inputs/Outputs description

1.5.3 Save parameters configuration
All GENSYS 2.0 Core parameters used in configuration are stored in a FLASH memory. When a parameter is
changed by the user, the new value is stored in a RAM memory. The new value will be effective as soon as
it is entered, but it will be lost if the GENSYS 2.0 Core power supply is cut or too low. To save the new
parameters to the FLASH memory, you must use SHIFT-I: the user must press both [SHIFT] + [i] keys
together. This will start the backup sequence and store all parameters in the FLASH memory. Now, the new
parameters will be effective even after a power supply failure. During this sequence (a few seconds) an
orange led on the upper right of the unit will light up to indicate that information is being stored.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

19


1.6 Remote control using a PC (Ethernet connection)
1.6.1 Setting up the Ethernet connection

With Windows XP:
Open the control panel.
Click on network connections.
Click on local network.



Click on Settings .


NOTE:
Due to the large number of parameters, the back-up procedure may take a few seconds. It is
thus essential to save parameters when the motor is stopped. To save all parameters, the user
must press on both [SHIFT] + [i] keys at the same time on the GENSYS 2.0 Core front panel.
Otherwise, the new parameters will be lost when shutting down the GENSYS 2.0 Core.
NEVER SHUT DOWN DURING STORAGE SEQUENCE (ORANGE LED ILLUMINATED).
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

20


Select Ethernet (TCP/IP) .
Properties.



Enter the addresses as shown above.

Note:
IP address 192.168.11.100 shown above can be used if GENSYS 2.0 Core IP address is 192.168.11.1 (factory
setting). Otherwise, computer and GENSYS 2.0 Core IP addresses should match the same subnet mask as
shown below.

Example:
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Computer IP address: AAA.BBB.CCC.XXX
GENSYS 2.0 Core IP address: AAA.BBB.CCC.YYY
Click on OK.
Close the networking windows.
Create/Modify Windows hosts file as explained below.
Windows hosts file can be found in C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc. It can contain lines to link
GENSYS 2.0 IP addresses to hostnames. For example:
#Factory IP address of GENSYS 2.0 Core:
192.168.11.1 gensys #generic IP address and hostname (factory settings).
#Example of 4 GENSYS 2.0 connected to an intranet:
192.168.123.101 genset1 #place optional comments here
192.168.123.102 genset2 #800kVA engine
192.168.123.103 genset3 #450kVA engine
192.168.123.104 genset4 #320kVA engine

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

21

When trying to change the host file with Windows Vista, you may come across a warning message like those
shown below:
Warning message 1
Access to C:\Windows\System32\drivers\etc\ hosts was denied
Warning message 2
Cannot create the C:\Windows\System32\drivers\etc\hosts file.
Check that the file's name and location are correct.
This problem may occur even if you are the system administrator. To solve this problem, follow these steps:
1. Click on start
, click on All Programs, Accessories, right click on notepad, and then Run as administrator.

If you are prompted for an administrator password or for a confirmation, type the password, or click
Allow.
2. Open the Hosts file, make the necessary changes, and then click Save on the Edit menu.

Notes on Ethernet connection
-If you change the IP address of a GENSYS 2.0 Core, you should also adapt Windows hosts file to be able to
use the hostname (http://gensys/ or any other hostname of your choice) in your Web browser. Otherwise
you will have to directly type the IP address of the GENSYS 2.0 Core you want to connect to in your Web
browser.
-If your computer is connected to your company intranet and you cannot or dont want to change its
network settings, CRE technology can provide a USB-Ethernet converter to setup a second network
configuration on your computer dedicated to GENSYS 2.0 Core communication. Reference of this module is
A53W2.

1.6.2 Changing GENSYS 2.0 Core IP address
GENSYS 2.0 Core IP address can be changed in configuration page: System/Serial ports configuration
/Com3/Com4.
Once the new IP address is entered, save the new settings by pressing key Shift I on the front panel. Then
you will need to restart your GENSYS 2.0 Core for the new settings to take effect.


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

22


1.6.3 Viewing web pages with the GENSYS 2.0 Core server
Connect GENSYS 2.0 Core to your computer using an Ethernet cross over cable.
Start your Web browser (Ex: Firefox or Internet Explorer).
Type in the GENSYS 2.0 Core URL or IP address (factory settings http://gensys or http://192.168.11.1 )
according to your GENSYS 2.0 Core and Windows hosts file settings.



The password page of the GENSYS 2.0 Core should appear. Enter your password. You can now access the
GENSYS 2.0 Core menus.
Note: Parameter E4042 allows the user to set the connection time in minutes. Once this time is elapsed
without Web communication, the password will be asked for again.

GENSYS 2.0 Core internal Web server is a very easy and efficient way of setting up your module. Various
menus can be accessed via a Web browser such as Firefox or Internet Explorer. However, it is
recommended that you disconnect the PC from the unit while the engine is running. Before connecting
GENSYS 2.0 Core to your PC, your PC must be configured as described in the previous chapter. Next figure
shows a typical GENSYS 2.0 Core menu as seen when accessed from a PC Web browser.


Figure 4 Typical menu
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

23


In this page, the user can choose from among 6 submenus (Genset electrical meters for example). It is also
possible to scroll through the other pages of the menu with the << and >> links. The ESC link acts in the same
way as the GENSYS 2.0 Core ESC key: it will display the parent menu.
The last 3 links are identical to the Fault / Alarm / Information keys on the GENSYS 2.0 Core front panel.

The next figure shows a typical configuration page. The user can change 5 different parameters (in this case,
two numerical values and three option lists) and send them to the GENSYS 2.0 Core using the [Save] button.
Clicking on the [Save] button changes the parameter immediately.
The modified parameter is held in volatile memory, and will be lost on power down unless the backup
parameter is used, [SHIFT] + [i]. If backup is used, the parameter is written in flash memory and will be used
for the start up.



Figure 5 Typical configuration page

1.6.4 Downloading a text file
When you are connected with a computer, a text file can be transferred between the GENSYS 2.0 Core and
the PC. This allows the following actions:
Upload new parameters to the GENSYS 2.0 Core.
Upload new equations to the GENSYS 2.0 Core.
Download parameters from the GENSYS 2.0 Core (safeguard).
Download equations from the GENSYS 2.0 Core (safeguard).

The data that can be transferred depends on your access level. For more information concerning text files
please refer to chapter 10.3.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

m
o
d
e
s

24

2 Operating modes
With the GENSYS 2.0 Core unit, three main operating modes and one special mode allow you to control your
generator.
Modes are:
Manual
Automatic
Test Mode

The special mode is:
Semi-automatic. This mode must be enabled when parameter E1614 =1 is enabled.

2.1 Manual mode
In manual mode, it is possible to control the generator with the front panel of the GENSYS 2.0 Core. All
steps from engine start to paralleling are controlled by pushing keys.
To start the engine push the [Start] key and hold down until the oil pressure fault disappears. On the front
panel, the 2 LEDs above the generator should light up. The left hand LED indicates that a speed greater
than zero is measured, whereas the right hand LED indicates that a voltage other than zero is measured.
If a speed governor is connected to GENSYS 2.0 Core, it is possible to increase the speed with the [+] key,
and decrease it with the [-] key.
If a voltage regulator is connected to GENSYS 2.0 Core, it is possible to increase and decrease the voltage
with the [SHIFT] + [+] keys and [SHIFT] + [-] keys.
As the generator starts, the synchroscope appears on the screen. It is then possible to synchronize using
the [+] and [-] keys and then close the breakers with the [0/I] keys.
Important: The internal synch check relay is always active, i.e. it is impossible to close the breaker if the
conditions for closing are not satisfied.
When the breaker is closed the corresponding Led on the front panel should light up.
As soon as the generator breaker is closed, the GENSYS 2.0 Core is switched to DROOP MODE for speed
and voltage, i.e. the speed and the voltage will decrease when the load increases. This mode can be fully
customized (droop % in speed settings/voltage settings) through the menu.
Load sharing is controlled with the [+] and [-] keys in droop mode.
To stop engine push the [Stop] key.

2.2 Auto mode
Speed and voltage droop are inhibited in this mode, the system is running isochronously, i.e. the speed and
the voltage remain unchanged whatever the load.
This mode has 4 main ways of operating:
One generator with Change Over (see 4.1)
The generator starts with a remote start or in the case of mains failure. When the generator is ready
(voltage, frequency), the mains breaker is opened and the generator breaker is closed. Should the mains
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

m
o
d
e
s

25

return to normal conditions or remote start is off, after a programmed delay the generator breaker is opened,
the mains breaker is closed and the generator set is stopped.
One generator paralleling with the mains (see 4.2 to 4.6 & option 2 see 17.1):
The generator starts with a remote start or if there is a mains failure. Paralleling depends on configuration:
NO CHANGE OVER
CHANGE OVER
NO BREAK CHANGE OVER
PERMANENT

Load sharing can be on a "base load" or "peak shaving" (peak lopping) basis. Depending on the
configuration, the generator will stop either when there is a remote stop or when mains power returns to a
stable level.

Power plant with several generators without automatic load/unload (see 4):
The generator starts with a remote start signal, and parallels with the bus. If there is a dead bus, GENSYS
2.0 Core will check with the other GENSYS 2.0 Core units before closing the bus breaker (this depends on
the validation of the dead bus management). The load sharing is accomplished via the inter GENSYS CAN
bus (11.2) or via the parallel lines (4.4). The generators stop with a remote stop signal.

Power plant with several generators with automatic load/unload (see 4):
The communication between GENSYS 2.0 Core units is via the inter GENSYS CAN bus (11.2 and
determines which generators start or stop. The number of generators used depends on load requirements
(all generators receive the remote start signal but only start if necessary).

2.3 Test mode
This mode tests the Auto mode. When you press the [Test] key, the engine starts as if there was a remote
start, and GENSYS 2.0 Core will carry out the standard Auto mode sequence. To exit TEST MODE, push
the [AUTO] key.

2.4 Semi auto mode
Generator
ready
Generator on Bus
bar
Waiting
Start
Synchro
Close breaker
load
Unload
Open breaker
Stop

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

S
t
a
r
t

s
e
q
u
e
n
c
e

26

3 Start sequence
During the start sequence protections are inhibited. This concerns all engine protections. When the engine
reaches the required state (E2057 = 6, see next figure) the protections are activated. A timer can be added to
inhibit protections during the "safety on" delay (E1514). The timer will start when E2057=6.


Figure 6 - Typical start sequence for fuel engines

Analogue sensors:
The analogue oil pressure and water temperature sensors are used before start-up for the preheat and
pre-lube checks: the water temperature (E0030) and oil pressure (E0029) must be ABOVE their respective
thresholds (E1155 & E1154) for the engine to be allowed to start (E2057 switches to 12).

The default setting for these thresholds is zero. When the thresholds are set at zero, the readings from the
analogue sensors are not checked before start-up.
See the chapter concerning Preheat/ Pre-lube/ Plug preheat.

The water temperature and oil pressure variables (E0030 & E0029) can be used in equations.

Failure to start:
In case of insufficient oil pressure or water temperature post start-up, or in case of excess oil pressure or
water temperature (digital inputs) during start-up, an "Engine not OK" warning will appear.
Please check your oil pressure and water temperature sensors and their parameters.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
e
d
e
f
i
n
e
d

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

27

4 Predefined configurations
4.1 Single generator in change-over mode

Figure 7 - Power plant in change-over mode without paralleling

Variable number Variable label Variable value
1179 Gen. number 1
1147 Nb. of gen. 1
4006 Nb. of Master 0
1148 Mains parallel Change-over
1153 Mains regul. X
1158 ILS compatible No
1177 Synchro mode Dynamic
1515 Deadbus manag. X
1258 Load/Unl. mode Inhibited
1846 Break Ma Fault Mains
1841 Fault start Yes
Table 6 - Typical basic change over configuration

In Change over mode, as shown in table 3, the generator starts and takes the load when a mains electrical
fault occurs. When mains power returns, the generator breaker is opened and the mains breaker is closed
after a pre-set delay.
For the generator to start when mains failure occurs, either a protection (mains or other) or a digital input
has to be configured as a "Mains electrical fault".
If remote start is on when mains are present the generator starts, GENSYS 2.0 Core opens the mains
breaker, then closes the generator breaker and takes the load.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
e
d
e
f
i
n
e
d

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

28


400 V
Mai ns el ectri cal faul t
Mai ns vol tage
Fastest mai ns
el ectri cal faul t
E2201
E1085
Remote start on
termi nal J3
400 V
Genset vol tage
Genset ready
E1142
Cool
down Generator CB
Swi tchover
del ay
E1459
Mai ns CB
E1459
Swi thover del ay
F
i
r
s
t

b
l
a
c
k
S
e
c
o
n
d


b
l
a
c
k
F
i
r
s
t

b
l
a
c
k
S
e
c
o
n
d

b
l
a
c
k
There are 2 blacks
STARTFOR EMERGENCY
will only start if a mains protection or a digital input is programmed as
"Mains electrical Fault ".
STARTFOR TEST
or switch load frommains to genset
There are 2 blacks
E0022
E2002
E0003
E2001
E2000
tri ggered by a protecti on or
di gi tal i nput set as "Mai ns
el ectri cal faul t"
Mai ns back
ti mer
E1459
Swi thover
del ay
E1459
Swi tchover
del ay
E1142
Cool
down

Figure 8 - Typical sequence in change over mode

4.2 Single generator in no-change-over mode

Figure 9 - Power plant in change over without paralleling

Variable number Variable label Variable value
1179 Gen. number 1
1147 Nb of gen. 1
4006 Nb of Master 0
1148 Mains parallel NoChangeOver
1153 Mains regul X
1158 ILS compatible No
1177 Synchro mode Dynamic
1515 Deadbus manag. X
Mains
Utility
GENSYS 2.0
Core
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
e
d
e
f
i
n
e
d

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

29

1258 Load/Unl. mode Inhibited
1846 Break Ma Fault Mains
1841 Fault start Yes
Table 7- Typical no change over basic configuration

In "No change over" mode (1148) GENSYS 2.0 Core only starts on receiving a remote start signal and doesn't
manage the mains breaker.

4.3 Generators paralleling with digital bus

Figure 10 - Power plant with several generators

Variable
number
Variable label Variable value
1179 Gen. number 1 to 14 : this value must be different for each device on the same
bus
1147 Nb of gen. 2 N 14
4006 Nb of Master 0
1148 Mains parallel No ch.over
1153 Mains regul X
1158 ILS compatible No
1177 Synchro mode Dynamic
1515 Deadbus
manag.
Yes
1258 Load/Unl. mode X
1020 MA kW <->
20mA
0
1021 MA 0kW setting 0
Table 8 - Typical basic multi Generator configuration
In this mode, "CAN bus on COM1 inter GENSYS 2.0" is used to manage the different units on the same bus.
This mode has better reliability and accuracy than equivalent analogue solutions.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
e
d
e
f
i
n
e
d

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

30

4.4 Generators paralleling with GENSYS 2.0 Core and parallel
line modules

Figure 11 - Generator paralleling with parallel lines

Variable
number
Variable label Variable value
1179 Gen. number 1 to 14 : this value must be different for each
device on the same bus
1147 Nb of gen. 2 N 14
4006 Nb of Master 0
1148 Mains parallel No ch.over
1153 Mains regul X
1158 ILS compatible Yes
1177 Synchro mode Dynamic
1515 Deadbus manag. No
1258 Load/Unl. mode Inhibited
Table 9 - Typical basic configuration for GENSYS 2.0 Core with parallel line modules
When GENSYS 2.0 Core is in ILS compatible mode, the active power sharing is handled via the parallel lines.
You have to disconnect the AVR output (H2-H4) and have an external device control the reactive power (CT
droop...). This mode is only recommended for use if you have older devices (which are not compatible with
CAN inter GENSYS 2.0), with ILS analogue parallel lines.

4.5 Multiple generators with static paralleling
This mode is useful when you urgently need to start a full plant with multiple generators. The generators
will be ready to take load in the shortest possible time.

This mode is also very useful when your installation includes high voltage transformers. Starting generators
which are paralleled together gives a progressive magnetisation without peaks (no transient short-circuit).
NOTE:
As long as there is a voltage on the bus bar, the dynamic paralleling mode will be used even if static
paralleling is configured. The static paralleling mode is only usable if all of the power generators are
stopped and bus bars are dead.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
e
d
e
f
i
n
e
d

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

31



Figure 12 - Static paralleling with 4 generators coupled together in emergency situation

4.5.1 Sequence:

Figure 13 - Example with 4 generators coupled together in emergency situation.

Loss of voltage
Each GENSYS 2.0 Core is ordered to start.
All breakers (CB1, CB2, CB3 & CB4) close as ordered by GENSYS 2.0.
DG1, DG2, DG 3, & DG4 start.
All generators reach the speed defined by the E1896 setting (CANBUS synchronization).
There is a residual voltage of 80V.
All C1outputs close simultaneously to activate excitation (after dialogue between GENSYS 2.0
units).
Alternator voltages increase gradually at the same time.
The plant is available to take up required load.
Breakers are closed when engine is stopped.
There is a residual voltage of 80V.

1500tr/min
400V
80V
Time
Speed
9s
Voltage
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
e
d
e
f
i
n
e
d

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

32

4.5.2 Advantages
Full plant availability in less than 10 seconds.
Gradual magnetization of the step-up transformer (no transient short-circuit).

4.5.3 Configuration
One GENSYS 2.0 Core per genset.
CAN bus must be connected between GENSYS 2.0 Core units.
An "Excitation" output (e.g. exit C1) must be configured on each GENSYS 2.0 Core unit.
Generator breaker must be powered by 24VDC (so as to close without AC).
In the Setup menu / General Central / sync mode. E1177 must be set as "Static stop".
The value of the maximum excitation rpm is set with E1896 (default: 97%).
The alternators must be identical.
Each GENSYS 2.0 Core must be equipped with a speed sensor (magnetic sensor / Pick-up).

4.6 Single generator paralleled with mains
This function needs OPTION 2 to be installed.
4.6.1 Configuration:

Figure 14 - Paralleling with mains

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
e
d
e
f
i
n
e
d

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

33

In permanent mode (1148) and peak shaving mode (1153), a mains power measurement is required. Internal
via L1-L6 inputs (Mains I1, I2, I3), or external via G1-G3 inputs (0-20 mA).

Variable number Variable label Variable value
1179 Gen. number 1
1147 Nb of gen. 1
1148 Mains parallel NoBreak CO / Permanent
1153 Mains regul Base load / Peak shav.
1158 ILS compatible No
1177 Synchro mode Dynamic
1515 Deadbus manag. X
1258 Load/Unl. mode Inhibited
Table 10 - Typical basic mains paralleling configuration

In all mains paralleling modes, if a "mains electrical fault" is set (via protections or digital inputs), the
generator starts and takes the entire load upon mains loss even if the remote start is off. In all cases, you
have to set a mains protection in order to determine the behaviour of your generator when mains power
disappears.

4.6.2 Mains paralleling mode:
Choice of mains paralleling mode is configured through parameter E1148.
1/ No Break CO (No break change over)
When remote start is on, the generator starts, synchronizes and parallels with the mains, then takes the
load (ramps up). Once the mains are unloaded, GENSYS 2.0 Core opens the mains breaker. When remote
start is off, the main takes the load in the same way as the generator did previously. If the generator
started for a mains failure, when mains power returns the GENSYS 2.0 Core synchronizes the load transfer
(ramps down), opens the breaker and then stops the generator.

STARTFOR EMERGENCY
will only start if a mains protection or a digital input is programmed as
"Mains electrical Fault ".
STARTFOR TEST
or totransfert loadfrommains toGE.
Triggered by
fastest "Mains
electri cal fault"
E1142
Cool
down
E1152
Unload
ramp
E1151
Load ramp
S
y
n
c
h
r
o

b
a
c
k
S
h
o
r
t

t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
t

f
r
o
m

G
E
t
o

M
a
i
n
s
S
h
o
r
t

t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
t

f
r
o
m
m
a
i
n
s

t
o

G
E
S
y
n
c
h
r
o

b
a
c
k
S
h
o
r
t

t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
t

f
r
o
m

G
E
t
o

m
a
i
n
s
E1085
Mai ns back
ti mer
400 V
Mai ns el ectri cal fault
Mai ns voltage
E2201
Remote start on
terminal J3
400 V
Genset vol tage
Generator CB
Mai ns CB
E0022
E2002
E0003
E2001
E2000
S
y
n
c
h
r
o
E1152
Unload
ramp
E1142
Cool
down
Thereis only 1black Noblack
E1459
Swithover
delay
G
E

r
e
a
d
y
G
E

r
e
a
d
y
F
i
r
s
t

B
l
a
c
k

Figure 15 - Typical sequence in No Break CO mode

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
e
d
e
f
i
n
e
d

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

34

Ramp configurations are available in the Configuration / active Power regulation menu.
The paralleling time depends on the load, the ramp time and the high and low thresholds.

2/ Permanent mode
When the remote start is on, GENSYS 2.0 Core starts the generator, synchronizes and parallels with the mains,
then ramps up load until it reaches its set point. In base load mode (E1153), the generator has a constant load
and the mains take the utility load variations. If the utility load is less than the generator set point, mains are
in reverse power. In the peak shaving mode (E1153), the mains have a constant load and the generator takes
the utility load variations.

Cool
down
S
y
n
c
h
r
o
L
o
a
d

r
a
m
p
B
a
s
e

l
o
a
d

o
r

p
e
a
k
s
h
a
v
i
n
g

(
C
H
P

f
o
r
e
x
a
m
p
l
e
)
U
n
l
o
a
d

r
a
m
p
START FOR EMERGENCY
will only start if a mains protection or a digital input is programmed as
"Mains electrical Fault ".
START FOR PRODUCTION /
base load or peak shaving
Tri ggered by
fastest "Mai ns
el ectri cal faul t"
E1142
Cool
down
E1152
Unl oad
ramp
S
y
n
c
h
r
o

b
a
c
k
T
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
t

l
o
a
d

f
r
o
m

G
E
t
o

M
a
i
n
s
E1085
Mai ns back
ti mer
400 V
Mai ns el ectri cal faul t
Mai ns vol tage
E2201
Remote start on
termi nal J3
400 V
Genset vol tage
Generator CB
Mai ns CB
E0022
E2002
E0003
E2001
E2000
There is only one black
E1459
Swi thover
del ay
E1152
Unl oad
ramp
E1151
Load ramp
G
E

r
e
a
d
y
F
i
r
s
t

B
l
a
c
k
No black. Mains CB is always closed
G
E

r
e
a
d
y

Figure 16 - Typical sequence in permanent mode

This application requires additional modules to manage the mains power supply. Additional modules can
be MASTER 2.0 (recommended) or GCR (not recommended for a new installation). MASTER 2.0 uses all-
digital technology whereas GCR uses analogue load share lines (sometimes called Parallel Lines).
With this setup, base load or peak shaving regulation can be selected, depending on your settings. In base
load mode, GCR doesn't require CPA.
This chapter is a basic overview. Full MASTER 2.0 functions can be found in the MASTER 2.0 technical
documentation.

Variable number Variable label Variable value
1179 Gen. number 1 to 14 : this value must be different for each
device on the same bus (*)
1147 Nb of gen. 2 N 14 (*)
1148 Mains parallel No ch.over
1153 Mains regul X
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
e
d
e
f
i
n
e
d

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

35

1158 ILS compatible Yes
1177 Synchro mode Dynamic
1515 Deadbus manag. Yes
1258 Load/Unl. mode X
1020 MA kW <-> 20mA 18000
1021 MA 0kW setting 0
1461 Ext kW measure +/- 10V
Table 11 - Paralleling with mains configuration
(*) In this instance, MASTER 2.0 is equivalent to a GENSYS unit, so it must be identified by a number. For
example, the use of one MASTER 2.0 gives a maximum of 13 generators.
To allow Power Factor regulation, the "Mains breaker in" (J1) input to GENSYS Core must be connected. Power
Factor regulation is not an option.

4.6.3 Interfacing GENSYS 2.0 Core with GCR

Figure 17 - GCR GENSYS 2.0 Core wiring diagram

GCR (39-40) GENSYS 2.0 Core (G4-G6): parallel lines (0-3V) to control active power.
GCR (42-43) GENSYS 2.0 Core (G1-G3): mains synchronization bus (+/- 3V).
GENSYS 2.0 Core (K3): -VBat from speed governor.

Variable number Variable label Variable value
1464 Mains kW Meas. External
1461 Ext kW measure +/- 10V
1020 MA kW <-> 20mA 20000
1021 MA 0kW setting 0
Table 12 - GENSYS 2.0 Core /GCR configuration
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
e
d
e
f
i
n
e
d

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

36

4.7 Power plant paralleled with mains using MASTER 2.0 or GCR

Figure 18 - Power plant paralleling with mains

4.8 Power plant paralleled with several mains using MASTER
2.0 or GCR

Figure 19 - Power plant paralleling with several mains

CAN bus
KW, KVAR, COS ( phi), ...
CPA2
GENSYS Core #n
n
GENSYS Core#2 GENSYS Core#1
GCR
Mains kW
Load
Analog load sharing lines
PLC
Synchronization bus
Rseau
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
e
d
e
f
i
n
e
d

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

37

This application requires additional modules to manage the mains power supply. Additional modules can be
MASTER 2.0 (recommended) or GCR (not recommended for a new installation). MASTER 2.0 uses all-digital
technology whereas GCR uses analogue load share lines (sometimes called Parallel Lines).
This chapter is a basic overview. Full MASTER 2.0 functions can be found in the MASTER 2.0 technical
documentation.

Variable number Variable label Variable value
1179 Gen. number 1 to n
1147 Nb of gen. n (>=2)
4006 Nb of Masters 1 to n
1148 Mains parallel No ch.over
1153 Mains regul. X
1158 ILS compatible Yes
1177 Synchro mode Dynamic
1515 Deadbus manag. Yes
1258 Load/Unl. mode X
Table 13 - Power plant paralleling with several mains configuration
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
n
s
t
a
l
l
i
n
g

a
n
d

c
o
m
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
i
n
g

a

G
E
N
S
Y
S

2
.
0

C
o
r
e

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

38

5 Installing and commissioning a GENSYS 2.0 Core
application
5.1 Minimum wiring diagram
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
n
s
t
a
l
l
i
n
g

a
n
d

c
o
m
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
i
n
g

a

G
E
N
S
Y
S

2
.
0

C
o
r
e

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

39

5.2 Complete wiring diagram



































GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
n
s
t
a
l
l
i
n
g

a
n
d

c
o
m
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
i
n
g

a

G
E
N
S
Y
S

2
.
0

C
o
r
e

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

40

5.2.1 Wiring guidelines:
The power cable must be kept separate from the communication cable. The communication cable can be
installed in the same conduit as the low level DC I/O lines (under 10 volts).
If power and communication cables have to cross, they should do so at right angles.
Correct grounding is essential to minimise noise from electromagnetic interference (EMI) and is a safety
measure in electrical installations. To avoid EMI, shield communication and ground cables appropriately.
If several GENSYS 2.0 Core units are used, each of the 0V power supplies (pin K3) must be connected to each
other with a 4mm cable (use an adapter for the 2.5mm connection to the GENSYS 2.0 Core power connector
itself).

1/ Power supply circuit breaker
Terminal K3 (0V) should never be disconnected. The battery circuit should only be opened using a breaker
placed between the battery's positive terminal and the K2 terminal (Power supply +).

Note:
If the K3 (0V) terminal is disconnected and the bus bar voltage is applied to the GENSYS 2.0 Core, there is
the risk of getting AC voltage on the CANBUS terminals.

2/ Interconnection of all battery negatives

Figure 20 - Interconnection of all battery negatives

3/ Rental fleet & Marine & HV generating sets
CAN Bus isolators are fitted inside the GENSYS 2.0 Core unit so it is possible to use it safely in MARINE
applications and on rental fleets.

5.2.2 Vibrations:
In case of excessive vibrations, the module must be mounted on suitable anti-vibration mountings.
5.2.3 Real time clock battery:
If the battery is disconnected, remove the rear panel and connect a 3V battery to the ST1 jumper (+battery:
ST1 up; -battery: ST1 down).
Battery maintenance must be provided separately from the GENSYS 2.0 Core unit.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
n
s
t
a
l
l
i
n
g

a
n
d

c
o
m
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
i
n
g

a

G
E
N
S
Y
S

2
.
0

C
o
r
e

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

41

5.3 Before commissioning (before going on site)
Schematics check
How?
Be sure you have the latest power plant schematics.
Why?
To be sure the wires will be present on site (Can bus connector, shielded wires...).
What?
0 Volt wiring
Shields
Speed governor / GENSYS 2.0 Core Interface
Automatic Voltage Regulator / GENSYS 2.0 Core Interface (droop current transformer must be
removed)
CAN Bus
MASTER 2.0
GCR

Check the list of inputs /outputs
How?
Check if the required function is present in the list of preset functions. If in any doubt check with
distributor.
Why?
To evaluate if an input/output needs an extra equation.
To evaluate quote / development time.
To evaluate necessary password clearance: Level 1 (consumer), Level 2 (Distributor), or Level 3
(CRE Technology only).

5.4 During commissioning
Start with safe conditions
How?
Disconnect the GENSYS 2.0 Core connector labelled as E (controls breakers).
Disconnect the wires between GENSYS 2.0 and the speed governor (G9 / G11).
Disconnect the wires between GENSYS 2.0 and the AVR (H2 / H4).
Check important GENSYS 2.0 Core parameters (See chapter 4.2).
Ask the technician who wired the power plant to lock the generator breaker open.
Why?
So as to be sure not to cause a false paralleling during commissioning.
Download the text file from the GENSYS 2.0 Core.
How?
With a PC and Internet explorer.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
n
s
t
a
l
l
i
n
g

a
n
d

c
o
m
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
i
n
g

a

G
E
N
S
Y
S

2
.
0

C
o
r
e

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

42

Why?
To store all parameters before starting the commissioning.
How?
As described in 11
Always use a text file corresponding to the current firmware version.
Never use an old text file coming from a previous version.

Check speed detection.
How?
Press on the [MANU] key.
Lock the fuel closed.
Access the information menu.
Press and hold the start button for 5 sec.
While the starter turns over, check that GENSYS 2.0 Core RPM is close to 200RPM.
Why?
To be sure that the GENSYS 2.0 Core will release the starter motor at the correct speed (around
400RPM).
To have over speed protection.

Start the generator, check speed detection.
How?
Set the speed governor potentiometer to its minimal value.
In [Manu] mode, press and hold [Start] button for 10s.
Adjust the speed to 1500 RPM (using speed governor potentiometer). This is given as example.
May be set at 1800 RPM for 60Hz applications, or other values depending on the installation.
In the information menu check that Frequency= 50.00 when RPM=1500RPM. You may have to
adjust the number of teeth on the gear where the measure is taken (for example).
Press [Stop] to stop the generator.

Check the 5 minimum protections before carrying out any other tests:
Over speed
Over voltage
Emergency stop
Oil Pressure
Water temp

How?
Short-circuit the sensors.
For over speed and over voltage, set the thresholds to 101%.

Check the control of the dead bus breaker

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
n
s
t
a
l
l
i
n
g

a
n
d

c
o
m
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
i
n
g

a

G
E
N
S
Y
S

2
.
0

C
o
r
e

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

43

How?
Be sure there is no critical load connected to bus bar
Plug the E connector into GENSYS 2.0 Core
Start the engine in manual mode by pressing [Manu] [Start]
Press the generator breaker [0/I] key.
Check the breaker settings (6.4.1)
The breaker should close (control OK) and the GENSYS 2.0 front face led should light up (feedback
position OK).
Press the generator breaker [0/I] Key.
The breaker should open and the led should go out.

Check mains / bus ref L1, L2 & L3
How?
In [Manual] mode, press and hold [Start] button for 10s.
Close the generator breaker by pushing the [0/I] Key.
Enter Synchronization menu to check that phase difference is 0.

Check synchronization
How?


Unplug connector E
Check Voltage on bus bar
Set the parameter Fail to synchronize at 500s.
[Start] the generator in [Auto] mode.
Check that you are now in synchronization mode using the information screen key [i].
Adjust the phase and frequency PID.
Frequency sweep is important over the 49-51Hz range.
PID phase is important around the synchronization point.
When the difference between phases is stable and near to 0, measure the voltages (L1 L2 and L3)
directly on the circuit breaker between generator and bus bar.
When you are sure there is no wiring problem, stop the generator.
Set the Fail to synchronize parameter according to the consumer's request.
Connect the E connector.
Start in automatic mode.
The generator must be paralleled in less than 10s.


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
n
s
t
a
l
l
i
n
g

a
n
d

c
o
m
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
i
n
g

a

G
E
N
S
Y
S

2
.
0

C
o
r
e

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

44

Synchronization test
Go to [Manu] mode.
Use the [+] key to increase frequency to 51Hz.
Go back to [Auto] mode.
Check that the correction is OK on the synchroscope.

Load sharing / kW regulation
For this application, check the stability of KW and kVAR regulation.
After the mains breaker closes, check load ramp (P=CsteGPID) configuration in the Active Power
Regulation menu.
If the genset goes into reverse power or stays at low load during the ramp time (E1151) increase
P=CsteGain in the Active Power Regulation menu.
At the end of the ramp time, the GENSYS 2.0 Core will swap to Kw Sharing Gain.
You can now set your load sharing gain and check the settings which depend on load impact (test
with load bench, for example).

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

45

6 Dedicated I/O lines
Inputs/outputs are associated with functions. Some I/Os are dedicated; others are programmable using
configuration parameters.

6.1 Speed governor interface
This interface is used to control engine speed.
The Speed governor control is used to manage Speed set points, Synchronisation, KW Load sharing and KW set
points.

The Speed governor interface can be:

Analogue output
PWM 500Hz digital output (CATERPILLAR/PERKINS)
Digital pulse output (see 6.2)

6.1.1 Analogue speed governor output
The following procedure must be used to match the interface with the speed governor:
Connect the ref. wire only.
Set the recommended gain and offset (if not in the list, contact CRE Technology).
Start the generator at 1500 RPM (MANU mode).
Measure the voltage between Ref. and the remote voltage input on the speed governor side.
Adjust GENSYS 2.0 Core output voltage (G11 G9) using the offset.
Connect the control wire.
Check the maximum speed range in manual mode with the + and - buttons.
The range must be within +/- 3Hz.


Figure 21 - Speed output

The ESG offset adjustment (E1077) can be set between -100 and +100 (-10VDC to + 10VDC), and is added
to the external speed reference (G11).
The Speed ref (G11) doesn't need to be connected if there is no voltage reference available.
ESG amplitude
(1076)
ESG offset (1077)
G9
G11
Deviation
+ Speed out
+
Speed
ref
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

46

0V must be wired with 4 mm cable as follows: battery speed governor GENSYS 2.0 Core.
See table below for presets. For specific settings contact your dealer.

Manufacturer Model ESG
Amplitude
(1076)
ESG
offset
(1077)
Terminal
G9 (out)
Terminal
G11 (ref)
Remark
HEINZMANN E6 10% 0% B3
KG6 /
System E6

-25.00% 46.50% E3 NC
PANDAROS
DC6
24%
26%

B3

A3
Voltage
converter to
isolate the
signal on the
line. (DC/DC)
(advise)
CUMMINS ECM pour
QSK23 /
QSK40 /
QSK45 /
QSX15 /
QSK 60
1.00% 00.00% 10
(Barber
Colman
Frequency
bias
input)
06 (5Volts)
EFC 2% 0% 8 9 Cf. Fig 34
ECM
(QST30)
1.00% -3.00% 18 15(7,75v)
BARBER
COLMAN
All models
with
analog
input
5% -1.65% ILS input 4v
DPG 2201 10% -1.05% ILS signal 2,5V
1.6% -27% ILS signal Digital
supply
(+5V)
1.6% 25% ILS signal BAT-
WOODWARD - 2301A/D
ILS+speed

- (Without
U&I)
25.00%

90.00%
25.00%

0%
10

25
11

26
Shunt 14-16

Shunt 26
(com) on 0V
2301D 25.00% 00.00% 15 16 G11
connected to
0v
2301A
Speed only
99.00% -1.00% 15 16 16 connected
to 0V
Pro-act /
Pro-act II
25.00% 00.00% Aux + Aux - Aux-
connected to
0V
EPG
System (
P/N :
8290-189 /
25.00% 30.00% 11 NC 11-12 open
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

47

8290-184)
MTU MDEC 25.00% -
20.00%
8 31 (5v) Programmable
VOLVO EDC 4 15.00% -
25.50%
24 / conn.
F
25 / conn.
F

EDC III 20.00% 25,00% Pot signal NC
PERKINS ECM 25.00% -
25.00%
30 3 (5v)
Deutz EMR 8.00% to
13.50%
-
26.20%
24 25 +/- 1.5 Hz not
to reach EMR
over-speed
TEM
compact
-- -- -- -- See
application
note
A40Z090200
GAC All ESD -20% -63.8% N P
Ghana
Control
PWC 2000 75.5% -25% J G
SCANIA 16 ltr full
electronic
engine
20% -36% 54 28
CATERPILLAR EMCPII
interface
5% -
13.10%
2 1 -2Hz and
+0,8Hz
(although the
GENSYS 2.0
output still
increase)
JOHN DEERE
LEVEL III
ECU 38%




34%
23.80%




-15%
G2(speed
input line)
915


G2
D2(sensor
return)914


5V(ref
speed)
999
Two different
wirings for the
same
governor.
Table 14 - Speed governor parameters

Connecting GENSYS 2.0 Core to a Cummins EFC:
Because of the very high sensitivity of Cummins EFC module input, please use the schematic below to
connect your GENSYS 2.0 Core to the EFC. This way, GENSYS 2.0 Core analogue speed output can be set
higher (parameter E1076) according to the resistors used.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

48

Gensys2.0
Speed
governor
EFC Cummins
15k
1.5k
speed out
speed ref
G9 (Speed Out)
G11 (Speed Ref)
speed input
8
9
K3 (0v)
2 ( battery - )

Figure 22 Connexion avec un EFC Cummins

6.1.2 PWM 500Hz (CATERPILLAR/PERKINS)
K4 output is a 500Hz PWM output signal between 0 and 5V. It is protected against short-circuits between
the output and the battery negative voltage. To activate this PWM output in order to control speed of
Caterpillar or Perkins engines, please check GENSYS 2.0 Core parameters as shown below.

Table 15 - PWM parameters


Figure 23 - PWM dynamic
Variable
number
Label Value Description
E1639 500 Hz ACT 1 Activates the speed control with 500Hz PWM. In this
mode the analogue speed output (G9 / G11) is
unavailable.
E1077 ESG offset 70% Is the PWM duty cycle set for nominal frequency.
E1076 ESG
amplitude
30% Is the range of the PWM duty cycle to control engine
speed. For example, if you have set 20.0%, the PWM will
vary +/- 10% around the nominal duty cycle value.
PWM (%)
Deviation
(E2058)
Max correction Min correction 0
100
70
55
85
Offset = 70%
Amplitude = 30%

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

49


Figure 24 Caterpillar PEEC and ADEM connections

6.2 Speed and voltage control with Contacts / Pulses

Figure 25 - Speed and voltage control with Contacts / Pulses

6.2.1 Parameters

Parameter Value Description Menu
E1260 +f [E2341] Output C1 Configuration/Transistor digital outputs
E1261 -f [E2342] Output C2 Configuration/Transistor digital outputs
E1262 +U [2343] Output C3 Configuration/Transistor digital outputs
E1263 -U [2344] Output C4 Configuration/Transistor digital outputs

6.2.2 Calibration procedure
Here follows the procedure for calibrating the +Hz and Hz outputs on the GENSYS 2.0 Core, necessary in
order to have good frequency droop compensation and load sharing.
Show the following parameter on the information screen: E2058.
Place the external speed potentiometer in the centre mid position.

GENSYS 2.0 Core
C1
K1
C2
K2
C3
K3
C4
K4
R
a
i
s
e

H
z

K1
L
o
w
e
r

H
z

K2
R
a
i
s
e

V
o
l
t

K3
L
o
w
e
r

V
o
l
t

K4
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

50

Set the following parameters as follows:
-E1598 on 50 which is about 1 percent load sharing difference (dead band on E2058)
-E1600 on 2 which is 200 msec. Pulse time
-E1874 on 2.0 sec. which is pulse pause time for frequency/voltage compensation
-E1873 on 0.1 sec. which is pulse length for frequency/voltage compensation.
-E1309 on 0 which is Integral gain (I) phase
-E1113 on 0 which is Integral gain (I) Frequency.

Note: For best results in sync it's important to set the GPID synch to high values (80 to 20).

Start the engine using the GENSYS 2.0 Core in manual mode.
Engine should run near its nominal speed with deviation caused by mechanical droop.
Put engine in Automatic mode. If a difference in speed is measured, GENSYS 2.0 Core should vary the
output until the engine is running at nominal speed.
Set frequency compensation for a recovery time of 10 sec for 0.5 Hz compensation (E1874).

If the generator is varying its speed but over or undershoots the nominal speed, the length of the E1873
pulse is too long. Make it a little bit shorter.
If it takes too long for the generator to reach nominal speed the E1874 period is too long. Make it a little bit
shorter.
If you are not able to get the right compensation then the following needs to be checked:
Does the potentiometer still turn if the GENSYS 2.0 Core is sending an output signal?
If not, the potentiometer is not able to control a sufficient speed range.
If every pulse causes overshooting it can be caused by the potentiometer motor running on, even when the
pulse is off. A shunt resistor over the motor input may solve this problem.

With GENSYS 2.0 Core in automatic mode, load the generator in island mode operation (if possible using
full load). Check that it still compensates the frequency according to specification: 0,5Hz in 10 sec (In this
case also refer to item 10, note two).
If this is OK the Frequency compensation is set.

Switch on one engine in auto mode and load it to 100%.
Disconnect the output to close the generator breaker of the next engine.

Start the next engine in auto mode and wait until the information screen shows that it is synchronizing,
then simulate the breaker being closed on the Generator auxiliary input.
The information screen should show that it is in Load sharing mode.
Check the value of E2058, which should read as follows:
Around 6000 for the engine which is supplying the load.
Around + 6000 for the engine which is not supplying the load.

If lower than + 6000 or higher than 6000 is shown, you have to increase the Load sharing Gain.
If higher than + 6000 or lower than 6000 is shown, you have to decrease the Load sharing Gain.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

51

If you are still not able to reach these settings you can do the following:
Reduce the load sharing 3 times.
Set parameter E1473 to 1 instead of 3, which makes the Load sharing Gain 3 times stronger.

Re-check the value of E2058.

The same procedure has to be followed to calibrate the voltage control.
E1599 No action range for +U/-U (in %), default value = 50
E1601 Impulsion delay for +U/-U, default value = 2 (200ms)
E1874 Set to 2 sec which is the pulse pause time for frequency/voltage compensation. This parameter was
adjusted for speed control, so do not modify.
E1873 Set to 0.1 sec which is the pulse length for frequency/voltage compensation. This parameter was
adjusted for speed control, so do not modify.



Figure 26 Speed and voltage control pulses

E2058
E1598 =
DEADBAND
E2342
= pulse -Hz
E2341
= pulse +Hz
Maxi( Hz) = -7000
Maxi(+Hz) = +7000
Load sharing / Synchro pulses only
E1600
T=700/E2058 seconds
GENSYS 2.0 wants the genset
to go slower
GENSYS 2.0 wants the genset
to go faster
Frequency centre pulses only
Frequency
Hz=E0020
DEADBAND=0.
1Hz
E2342
= pulse -Hz
E2341
= pulse +Hz
E1873
GENSYS 2.0 wants the genset
to go slower
GENSYS 2.0 wants the
genset to go faster
Summation of both signals
E1874
E1873
E1874
E2342
= pulse -Hz
E2341
= pulse +Hz
E1873
E1874
E1873
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

52

6.3 Analogue AVR (Auto Voltage Regulator) control
AVR output can be an analogue output, or a digital pulse output. Analogue output is detailed here, digital
pulse output is detailed in 6.2
AVR control is used to manage Voltage set points, Voltage Synchronization (U=U), KVAR Load sharing and
Power Factor regulation.

To set AVR control correctly:
Start engine (MANU Mode), then set gain E1103:= 0 and Offset E1104:=0 on GENSYS2.0.
Set the AVR system to 400 VAC using its potentiometer.
If you can adjust to 400VAC on the AVR go to chapter 5
If you cannot adjust to 400 VAC on the AVR go to chapter 6
Gain and Offset adjustment: Enter maximum correction (E2038 = + 7000) with Shift and + buttons. From the
following table, choose the best values for Gain and offset to obtain 430VAC 5V:

GAIN OFFSET
0 0
255 0
255 255
0 255

If necessary, modify Gain and then Offset to obtain 430VAC 5.
Enter minimum correction (E2038 = - 7000) with Shift and - buttons, then check that you have 370VAC 5
Set to no correction (E2038 = 0) and check that you have 400VAC.

Gain and Offset adjustment if you cannot obtain 400V on the AVR: Adjust the maximum voltage with the
AVR potentiometer, which is normally below 400VAC. Choose the best values for Gain and offset to obtain
the maximum deviation.


Figure 27 - Voltage output
AVR gain (1103)
AVR offset
(1104)
H2 Deviation
AVR out - H4
47R
AVR out +
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

53

See table below for preset settings. For specific setting contact your dealer.
Manufacturer Model AVR gain
(1103)
AVR
offset
(1104)
Termina
l H2
Termina
l H4
Remark
STAMFORD MX321 255 0 A2 (+) A1 (-) Trim pot of AVR fully CW
SX440 155 0 A2 (+) A1 (-) Trim pot of AVR fully CW
BASLER AEC63-7
AVC63-4
AVC63-4A
APR63-5
APR125-5
SSR63-12
240 240 6 7 Remove the shunt
DECS32-
15-xxx
DECS63-
15-xxx
DECS125-
15-xxx
DECS300
- - - - Use VAR control included
in the DECS.
VR63-4 240 240 VAR+ VAR- Remove the shunt
MARATHON
ELECTRIC
DVR2010 100 0 Aux
input A
Aux
input B

DVR2000 - - - - Replace with SE350 or
DVR2000E
AVK Cosimat
N+
255 0 Pot + Pot -
MA329 155 0 A2(+) A1(-)
MarelliMotori M8B 240 240 P Q Remove the shunt PQ
M8B400 0 0 8 6 470nF capacitor between 8
and M.
Dont connect shield.
M405A64
0
0 0 6 8 470nF capacitor between 6
and M.
Dont connect shield.
KATO K65-12B
K125-10B
255 0 2
Or 4
3
Or 7
Jumpers have to be
removed.
Available soon
MECC ALTE SPA UVR6 250 200 Pot + Pot - 50kOhms in serial with H2
LEROY SOMER R449 253 255 Pot
input +
Pot
input -
Remove the shunt
R448 253 255 Pot
input +
Pot
input -
Remove the shunt
R221 100 241 Pot
input
+(6)
Pot
input
(7)
Remove the shunt. Pot
ineffective
R230 253 255 Pot
input +
Pot
input -
Remove the shunt
CATERPILLAR DVR
KVAR/PF
130 210 7 45
VR6 130 245 1.5kOhms in serial with H2
CDVR 255 100 P12.6 P12.3
Table 16 - AVR parameters
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

54

6.4 Relay outputs
6.4.1 Breakers
GENSYS 2.0 Core is equipped with 4 NO relays (at rest) for breaker control.

2 relays to control the generator breaker, one for opening (E4) and one for closing (E5).
2 relays to control the mains breaker, one for opening (E1) and one for closing (E2).

These outputs allow you to control various types of breaker. This chapter explains the available setups
and their associated variables.

Variables
E2000 Digital input for GENSET breaker return
E2001 Digital input for Mains breaker return
E2016 Genset breaker control
E2017 Mains breaker control
E1149 Delay before breaker opening/closure failure
E1992 Choice of Genset (Genset) breaker relay work mode
E1993 Choice of Mains (Mains) breaker relay work mode
E1994 Time before undervoltage trip coil control contact closure
E1995 Time before a new closure request is authorized
E1893 Trip coil min. pulse length.

Note:
Breaker control can be viewed by showing variables E2016/2017 (Mains/Genset relay) and E2000/2001
(breaker status info). Whatever the setup chosen, any opening or closure of the relays by the GENSYS 2.0
Core is shown by the values of E2016 and E2017 changing (1=closure, 2=opening). When the breaker gives
the correct feedback, the GENSYS 2.0 Core LED display lights up and variables E2000 (Mains) or E2001
(Genset) switch to 1.
The delay for a breaker to close before a failure is detected is set to 5 seconds as standard
(Configuration/Enhanced configuration/Modification by variable n/1149).
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

55

Working modes:
The Configuration/Enhanced configuration/ gen/mains breaker setup menu allows you to chose the working
mode of these relays via the variables E1992 for the mains and E1993 for the generating set . Table below
explains the different functioning modes featured by GENSYS 2.0 Core.

E1992 (Mains)
/E1993 (Genset)
Relay output mode Chronogram
0 Continuous contact to open
E1 (Mains) / E4 (Genset)

CLOSED OPEN

Positive pulse to close
E2 (Mains) / E5 (Genset)
1
(default setting)
(Contactor)
Continuous contact to open
E1 (Mains) / E4 (Genset)

CLOSED
OPEN

Continuous contact to close
E2 (Mains) / E5 (Genset)
2

Undervoltage coil opening
E1 (Mains) / E4 (Genset)

CLOSED OPEN

Pulse to close
E2 (Mains) / E5 (Genset)
3 Undervoltage coil opening
E1 (Mains) / E4 (Genset)

CLOSED OPEN

Continuous contact to close
E2 (Mains) / E5 (Genset)
4
(Breakers without
undervoltage
coils)
Pulse to open
E1 (Mains) / E4 (Genset)

CLOSED OPEN

Pulse to close
E2 (Mains) / E5 (Genset)
5 Pulse to open
E1 (Mains) / E4 (Genset)

CLOSED OPEN

Continuous contact to close
E2 (Mains) / E5 (Genset)
Table 17 - Breaker control configuration


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

56

For control using a pulse or an undervoltage coil, the necessary parameters are:
E1893: pulse length.
E1994: Undervoltage coil delay. This sets the time between the opening of the breaker and the closing
of the undervoltage coil control contact.
E1995: Undervoltage coil pause time. Sets the time between the closing of the undervoltage trip coil
control contact (E1 or E4) and another breaker close request by the other contact (E2 or E5). This must
be longer than the breaker reset time.
These values can be modified in the Configuration/Enhanced configuration/ Modification by variable n menu.
Bobine Manque
Output Close
Breaker Feedback
E1994
E1995
Open Close
Close


To close the generator breaker the following conditions have to be met:
Voltage must be between 70% (parameter E1432) and 130% (parameter E1433) of the nominal voltage
(parameter E1107 or E1108).
Speed must be between 70% (parameter E1434) and 130% (parameter E1435) of the nominal speed
(parameter E1080 or E1081).

6.4.2 Fuel & Crank
The standard functions for these two relay outputs are for normal Fuel and Crank relay applications.
Access to settings in the GENSYS2.0 Core menu: /Configuration/Enhanced configuration/digital transistor
output/ >> / >> / unused
Crank is A1 (OUTPUT 6), and Fuel is A2 (OUTPUT 7). These two outputs are relays and are fully configurable
through the Enhanced configuration/Digital transistors output/ >> / >> menu or through equations.

6.5 Crank / Fuel / Starter 2 / Starter 3 functions
If there is an external crank relay, you can use the crank function (E2018) on a digital output. The behaviour
will be exactly the same as for the crank relay output (terminal A1).
If there is an external fuel relay, you can also use the fuel function (E2019) on a digital output. The
behaviour will be exactly the same as for the fuel relay output (terminal A2).

WARNING:
Never switch from one mode to another when the plant is in use. An unwanted breaker state
modification may occur.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

57

For multiple starters (E1138 = 2 or 3), the outputs can be configured with the Starter 2 (E2267) and Starter 3
(E2268) functions. The number of attempts (E1134) is the global number and not the number of attempts per
starter. For example:
The number of attempts (E1134) is 4
The default starter (E1602) is 2
The number of starters (E1138) is 3
Output 1 (terminal C1) is configured as Starter 2 (E1260 = 2267)
Output 2 (terminal C2) is configured as Starter 3 (E1261 = 2268)

Note: Should the engine refuse to start, the sequence will be:
C1 activated, crank rest, C2 activated, crank rest, A1 activated, crank rest, C1 activated, start failure
For each starter's functions (Starters 1 to 3), there are separate parameters for starter disengagement relative
to engine speed, which depend on starter type (electric, pneumatic...).
Configuration/Enhanced configuration/ start:stop sequence / >>:
Cra.1 drop out E1325:= 400rpm
Cra.2 drop out E1326:= 380rpm
Cra.3 drop out E1327:= 380rpm.

6.6 Water preheat / Pre-lubrication / Pre-glow functions

Figure 28 - Connections for water preheat, pre lubrication and pre glow

6.6.1 Manual mode
Preheat is active when J7 is closed. The water temperature sensor isnt required.
Pre lubrication is active when J8 is closed. The oil pressure sensor isnt required.
Pre glow is active when J9 is closed, when you push GENSYS 2.0 Core start button, or if J10 is
closed.

Output 1 function (1260) = Water preheats (2083)
Output 2 function (1261) = Pre lubrication (2084)
Output 3 function (1262) = Pre glow (2085)
GENSYS 2.0 Core
Output 1: C1

Output 2: C2

Output 3: C3
Pre heat
relay
Pre lubrication
relay
Pre glow
relay
F6 / F7 F8 / F9
Water
temperature
sensor
Oil pressure
sensor
J6: Spare Input 1: Preheating (2273)

J7: Spare Input 2: Manual water preheat (2224)

J8: Input 3: Spare Manual oil prelub. (2225)

J9: Spare Input 4: Manual preglow request (2226)

J10: Input 5: Manual start request (2227)
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

58

6.6.2 Auto mode
Pre-heat is activated if J6 is closed and if temperature is under the pre-set threshold (E0030 < E1154).

Note: The water temperature sensor is required in this instance.

Pre-lubrication will be activated when engine is in pre-start (E2057 = 1) if pressure is under the threshold
(E0029 < E1155). If the threshold (E1155) is 0, then pre-lubrication is active while the engine is in pre-start
(E2057 = 1). In the last case the oil pressure sensor isnt required.
Pre glow is active when engine state is pre glow or start (E2057 = 12 or 2).

6.7 Air fan

Figure 29 - Connection for air fans
In all cases, the AIR FAN will be activated if J5 is activated or if the max water temp protection (F6/F7
analogue input) is configured and triggers.

6.7.1 Manual mode
AIR FAN output is activated if engine speed is other than 0.

6.7.2 Auto mode
AIR FAN is activated if temperature is over the pre-set threshold (E1178) and de-activated when water
temperature is lower than 80% of the threshold. AIR FAN is not activated if engine is stopped (E2057=0)










Output 1 function (1260) = Air fan (2215)
GENSYS 2.0 Core
Output 1: C1 Air fan relay J5: water temp input
F6 / F7
Water temperature
sensor
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

59

6.8 Fuel filling / Coolant filling / Oil filling

Figure 30 - Connections for filling

6.8.1 Manual mode
Output is only activated if J8 is closed.

6.8.2 Auto mode
The 3 filling features all have exactly the same behaviour. Fuel filling will be described below. For the other
functions, fuel is to be replaced by coolant or oil and the variable number by the values shown in the figure
above.
Fuel filling Cooling filling Oil filling
Low level input E2230 E2243 E2246
High level input E2231 E2244 E2247
Filling output E2229 E2242 E2245
Table 18 - Fuel/cooling/oil filling parameters

GENSYS 2.0 Core
J6: Input 1: Fuel low level (2230)
J7: Input 2: Fuel high level (2231)
J8: Input 3: Manu fuel fill (2252)
J9: Input 4: Coolant low level (2243)
J10: Input 5: Coolant high level (2244)
J11: Input 6: Man cool fill (2253)
J12: Input 7: oil low level (2246)
J13: Input 8: oil high level (2247)
J14: Input 9: Manu oil fill (2254)

Output 1: C1
Output 2: C2
Output 3: C3
Output 1 function (1260) = Fuel filling (2229)
Output 2 function (1261) = Coolant filling (2242)
Output 3 function (1262) = Oil filling (2245)

Coolant fill relay
Fuel fill relay
Oil fill relay
F1/F2 F3/F4
Level sensor Level sensor
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

60

Fuel fil li ng
(2229)
Fuel high level
(2231)
Fuel low level
(2230)

Figure 31 - Fuel filling diagram

6.8.3 Pre-set filling example
If the tank is fitted with a fuel level sender that can be connected to an analogue input (F1/F2 or F3/F4), it
is possible to calculate the fuel low/high limits using equations. The following example shows the case of
filling a tank. It requires filling if it is less than 20% full and filling should stop when it reaches 80% full.



E2230 is the low fuel level.
E2231 is the high fuel level.
E0031 is engine measure 1 (potentiometer input F1 / F2).
E2020 is the digital Spare output 1 which triggers the filling of the tank (C1 terminal).

PROG 1BLOC
E2230:=E0031 LT 40;
E2231:=E0031 GT 80;
E2020:=( E2230 OR E2020) AND (!E2231)
BEND
Dont forget to configure the output 1 in Used by equations.



GENSYS 2.0 Core
Output 1: C1
Analogue input 1: F1 / F2
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

D
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

61

6.9 Analogue load share lines
It is possible to use traditional analogue load share lines (often called Parallel Lines) with the GENSYS 2.0 Core
product. The example shown is in association with a BARBER COLMAN product.

GENSYS 2.0 BARBER COLMAN
DYN2 80108/80109
Parallel lines + Parallel lines +
Parallel lines - Parallel lines -
G6 10
G4 11

Figure 32 - Wiring parallel lines

Change the following parameters in the "Configuration/Enhanced configuration/powerplant overview"
menu to activate parallel lines:
ILS compatible E1158= YES (0)
Deadbus manage. E1515= NON (1)

6.10 Watchdog output
A watchdog option is available using the C5 output. This option must be specified upon ordering your unit
so that CRE Technology can activate it. For more information concerning this function, please contact CRE
Technology.


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

62

7 I/O lines
7.1 Digital input
They are divided into dedicated and configurable inputs.
For Digital inputs 1 to 10 (J6 to J15) the following parameters can be set:
Label: can be modified with parameters file.
Validity: can be modified using configuration menu or equations.
Direction: can be modified using configuration menu or equations.
Delay: can be modified using configuration menu or equations.
Function: can be modified using configuration menu or equations.

To modify a parameter through the menu, go to the configuration menu: Enhanced configuration/Digital
transistors output. Choose the digital input to modify using the [ << ] and [ >> ] soft keys to change page (2
inputs per page), and [ ] and [ ] to choose the parameter. The description of the function is given on
the next line, and can be modified with the [ + ] and [ - ] keys.

Do not forget to use [SHIFT] + [ i ] to save modified values.
The following table shows all input associated parameters.

Not delayed
value
Delayed
value
Default label Label Validity Direction Delay Function
J1 N.A. E2000 Mains breaker N.A. N.A. E1453 N.A. N.A.
J2 N.A. E2001 Gen breaker N.A. N.A. E1454 N.A. N.A.
J3 E2787 E2002 Remote start N.A. N.A. E1455 E1990 N.A.
J4 E2788 E2804 Oil Pres/In J4 L2804 E4035 E1456 E1998 E1996
J5 E2789 E2805 Wat.Temp/In J5 L2805 E4036 E1457 E1999 E1997
J6 E2790 E2806 Spare Input J6 L2806 E1287 E1297 E1277 E1267
J7 E2791 E2807 Spare Input J7 L2807 E1288 E1298 E1278 E1268
J8 E2792 E2808 Spare Input J8 L2808 E1289 E1299 E1279 E1269
J9 E2793 E2809 Spare Input J9 L2809 E1290 E1300 E1280 E1270
J10 E2794 E2810 Spare InputJ10 L2810 E1291 E1301 E1281 E1271
J11 E2795 E2811 Spare InputJ11 L2811 E1292 E1302 E1282 E1272
J12 E2796 E2812 Spare InputJ12 L2812 E1293 E1303 E1283 E1273
J13 E2797 E2813 Spare InputJ13 L2813 E1294 E1304 E1284 E1274
J14 E2798 E2814 Spare InputJ14 L2814 E1295 E1305 E1285 E1275
J15 E2799 E2815 Spare InputJ15 L2815 E1296 E1306 E1286 E1276
Table 19 - Input parameters

7.1.1 Configurable input label
This is the name you give to the input. The name will be displayed in the info, alarm, and fault screens if so
programmed. You can change the label using the menu, or you can download a text parameter file via the
Internet connection.


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

63

7.1.2 Validity
Validity input variable numbers (E1287 to 1296) can be set as:
Num Label Function
2330 Never Never active: should be selected if you do not use the input.
2329 Always Always active: input will be monitored as long as GENSYS 2.0 has power.
2192 Post-Start Input will be monitored at the end of the "safety on delay *E1514+ (*)
2331 Stabilized Input will be monitored when genset is ready for use (E2057 = 6).
2332 Spare scenario Input will be monitored as defined in equations.
Table 20 - Input validity domain
(*) Safety ON time configuration is accessible via Enhanced configuration/Start / stop sequence menu, on
the Timers page. Parameter is configured in E2192, and counter value is in E1514.

7.1.3 Direction
Direction input variable numbers: (E1297 to 1306)
For each of the ten inputs, two options are available:
Num Label Function
0 Norm open Should be selected in normal cases unless the input is used for protection.
1 Norm close Normally closed; should be selected if the input is normally connected to 0V and is
opened when active
Table 21 - Input direction domain

7.1.4 Delay
Direction input variable numbers: (E1277 to 1286)
For each input, delay can be defined in 0.100 ms steps between 0 and 6553 s.

7.1.5 Input functions
Function input variable numbers (E1267 to 1276) can be set as indicated in the following table.

Value Function Description
0 Unused Should be selected if you do not use the input.
1 Used by equations If the effect of the input activation is not listed below, choose
"used by equations"
2224 Manual water preheat
request
Can be chosen if a coolant pre heating system is installed; can
be used in conjunction with digital transistor output. Will only
work in manual mode.
2225 Manual oil prelube request Can be chosen if a pre lubrication pump is installed on the
engine; can be used in conjunction with digital transistor
output. Will only work in manual mode.
2226 Manual preglow request Can be chosen if pre heating plugs are installed on the engine;
can be used in conjunction with digital transistor output. Will
only work in manual mode.
2205 Fault reset request If an external reset is wired to the input, choose fault reset
request. This will have the same effect as pressing the reset key
on the GENSYS 2.0 Core front panel on Fault and Alarm
displays.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

64

2227 Manual start request To be selected if a remote start command is to be installed.
2228 Manual stop request To be selected if a remote stop command is to be installed -
different from emergency stop.
2233 Manual +f request To be selected if a remote frequency increasing command is to
be installed.
2234 Manual -f request To be selected if a remote frequency decreasing command is to
be installed.
2235 Manual +U request To be selected if a remote voltage increasing command is to be
installed.
2236 Manual -U request To be selected if a remote voltage decreasing command is to be
installed.
2231 Fuel high level To be selected for a max level sensor or a calculation; can be
used in conjunction with digital transistor output.
2230 Fuel low level To be selected for a min level sensor or a calculation; can be
used in conjunction with digital transistor output.
2244 Coolant high level To be selected for a max level sensor or a calculation; can be
used in conjunction with digital transistor output.
2243 Coolant low level To be selected for a min level sensor or a calculation; can be
used in conjunction with digital transistor output.
2247 Oil high level To be selected for a max level sensor or a calculation; can be
used in conjunction with digital transistor output.
2246 Oil low level To be selected for a min level sensor or a calculation; can be
used in conjunction with digital transistor output.
2197 Securities inhibition Will inhibit all protections. These alarms and faults remain
listed in the faults and alarm logging.
2198 No cranking To be selected to prevent engine from starting.
2210 Ext. secu.(Hard shut down) If external protections are installed, for immediate stop of the
engine. See recommendations in "Directions" paragraph.
2209 Ext. fault(Soft shut down) If external protections are installed, for immediate opening of
Genset breaker and stopping of the engine after cooling down
timer has expired. See recommendations in "Directions"
paragraph.
2208 External alarm If external protections are installed, to report an alarm. See
recommendations in "Directions" paragraph.
2217 Generator electrical fault If external protections are installed, protection will open genset
breaker and try to synchronize again. See recommendations in
"Directions" paragraph.
2218 Mains electrical fault If external protections are installed, protection will open mains
breaker and try to synchronize again. See recommendations in
"Directions" paragraph.
2681 Non essential trip alarm Remote non essential load.
2736 Help + Fault ( Soft shut
down)
To be selected to stop the engine after cool down. The GENSYS
2.0 Core will ask another engine to start before stopping itself.
2737 Help + Gen Electrical Fault To be selected to activate the "gen electrical fault" action. The
GENSYS 2.0 Core will ask another engine to start before
stopping itself.
2655 Remote stop horn To be selected to stop the external Horn. Useful if one output is
set as "Horn". to be used in conjunction with digital outputs
2336 Gen. breaker Close manual To be selected if manual remote close button for genset
breaker is programmed.
2337 Gen. breaker Open manual To be selected if manual remote open button for genset
breaker is programmed.
2338 Mains breaker Close To be selected if manual remote close button for mains breaker
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

65

manual is programmed.
2339 Mains breaker Open
manual
To be selected if manual remote open button for mains breaker
is programmed.
2001 Generator breaker Aux To be selected if a different input for the generator breaker
position is required.
2000 Mains breaker Aux To be selected if a different input for the mains breaker is
required.
2002 Remote start To be selected if a different input for remote start is required.
2003 Oil pressure fault To be selected if a different input for oil pressure fault is
required.
2004 Water temperature fault To be selected if a different input for water temperature fault is
required.
2241 Priority generator To be selected if load/unload features depend on a priority
genset; see Configuration -> load / unload menu
2257 Synchronization forced Will force GENSYS 2.0 Core to synchronize the output with the
governing system. AVR will act so as to synchronize the genset.
The Power mode (E2088) is forced to Synchronization (1).
2258 Fixed kW forced Will force GENSYS 2.0 Core to give constant power delivery. The
output governing system will maintain a fixed power output
from the genset. The Power mode (E2088) is forced to Fixed
kW (4).
2259 kVAR sharing forced The output to AVR will share reactive load with other gensets,
using the inter GENSYS 2.0 Core CAN bus. (E.g. to be used in
manual mode). The AVR cont. mode (E2090) is forced to
kVAR sharing (5).
2656 Voltage Droop forced Will force the GENSYS 2.0 Core to apply Droop to the AVR
command. Set with *E1105+. The AVR cont. mode (E2090) is
forced to Voltage droop (1).
2260 No manu mode Will inhibit the "Manu" key on the GENSYS 2.0 Core front panel.
GENSYS 2.0 Core will never be in Manu mode even if you press
the GENSYS 2.0 Core "Manu" key.
2261 External manu mode
request
Will put GENSYS 2.0 Core into Manual mode. Will have the
same effect as the GENSYS 2.0 Core "Manu" key.
2661 Running with breaker open Allows the engine to run in Auto mode without paralleling or
closing its breaker.
2279 Select speed 2 Will select the second speed set point.
2280 Select volt 2 Will select the second voltage set point.
2281 Select KW 2 Will select the second power output set point.
2513 Select Pnom 2 Will select the second nominal power (active and reactive).
2273 Preheating Can be chosen if a coolant pre heating system is installed; can
be used in conjunction with a digital transistor output. Will
work in auto mode.
2252 Manu fuel fill To be selected for a manual fuel refill; to be used in conjunction
with digital outputs.
2253 Manu coolt fill To be selected for a manual coolant refill; to be used in
conjunction with digital outputs.
2254 Manu oil fill To be selected for a manual lubricant refill; to be used in
conjunction with digital outputs.
2766 Heavy consumer request To be selected to activate the "Heavy consumer control" special
sequence. See below, 9.14.
5000 Unload brk1 in Order output to close generator breaker n1 upon startup if the
nominal power<E4001
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

66

5001 Unload brk2 in Order output to close generator breaker n1 upon startup if the
nominal power<E4002
5002 Unload brk3 in Order output to close generator breaker n1 upon startup if the
nominal power<E4003
5003 Unload brk4 in Order output to close generator breaker n1 upon startup if the
nominal power<E4004
5004 Unload brk5 in Order output to close generator breaker n1 upon startup if the
nominal power<E4005
Table 22 - Input functions

7.1.6 Dedicated inputs
In the menu list, each input is named after its pin number on the wiring of GENSYS 2.0 Core. Polarity can be
normally open or normally closed. Program this according to the wiring you will have on site.
As a reminder:
J1 is the Mains breaker state.
J2 is the Genset breaker state.
J3 is the remote start input.
J4 is the oil pressure switch.
J5 is the cooling temperature switch.
[E2000, E2001, E2002, E2003, E2004]

7.2 Digital outputs
Output1 to Output5 are wired on the C connector. These outputs are electronically protected, but not
isolated.
Outputs 1 to 5 (E1260, E1261, E1262, E1262, E1264): function and polarity can be defined.
The "Crank" and "Fuel" relay outputs can be set up for other functions. The initial settings are for "Crank"
and "Fuel". Polarity cannot be changed for these relay outputs. "Crank" output function can be set with
[E1989]; Fuel output function is set with [E1916].

7.2.1 Output configurable functions
Value Function Description
0 Unused To be selected if output is not wired.
1 Used by equations To be selected if output is used by equations.
2083 Water preheat Can be used for coolant pre heat system.
2084 Pre-lubrication Can be used for pre lubrication pump.
2085 Pre glow Can be used for cylinder pre heating plugs
2018 Crank Can be used for external crank relay
2019 Fuel Can be used for external fuel relay
2211 Excitation Can be used to activate an external AVR in a static synchronizing
configuration [see Configuration -> power plant overview]
Will activate an external excitation relay when engine state [E2057]
is: engine ready [5]; generator ready [6]; wait after stop request [7];
cool down [8]. In the case of dynamic paralleling [E1177 = 0], the
output will also be activated in the start [2], warm up [3], and
nominal speed [4] states.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

67

2212 Fuel (energize to stop) Can be used for an external relay if fuel solenoid has to be energized
to stop the engine. Will activate an external fuel relay [Energize to
stop] when engine is running [E0033 > 0] and if there is an engine
fault [E2046] or a stop request. In Manual mode the stop request
will be the Stop key *E2047+ or the Manual stop request *E2228+
or no fuel [E2019 off].
2016 Generator breaker order

Can be used to open or close genset breaker.
The outputs configured with this function will have exactly the same
behaviour as the outputs for the Generator breaker [E4 to E6].
2017 Mains breaker order Can be used to open or close genset breaker.
The outputs configured with this function will have exactly the same
behaviour as the outputs for the Mains breaker [E1 to E3].
2202 Alarms summary Fault summary: will activate an output when there is at least one
alarm triggered by GENSYS 2.0 Core.
2204 Securities summary Fault summary: will activate an output when there is at least one
Security triggered by GENSYS 2.0 Core.
2203 Faults summary Fault summary: will activate an output when there is at least one
fault triggered by GENSYS 2.0 Core.
2200 Gen. elec faults summary Fault summary: will activate an output when there is at least one
mains elec. fault triggered by GENSYS 2.0 Core.
2201 Mains elec. faults
summary
Output will be activated whenever a protection triggers a mains
electrical fault.
2724 Trip out 1 Output activated by the protection in the "Non essential consumer
trip" sequence. See 9.15 ; This is the first trip; Non Essential
consumer trip
2725 Trip out 2 Output activated by the protection in the "Non essential consumer
trip" sequence. See 9.15; This is the 2nd trip activated [E1894]
seconds after the previous one. Non Essential consumer trip
2726 Trip out 3 Output activated by the protection in the "Non essential consumer
trip" sequence. See 9.15; This is the 3rd trip activated [E1894] sec.
after the previous one. Non Essential consumer trip
2727 Trip out 4 Output activated by the protection in the "Non essential consumer
trip" sequence. See 9.15; This is the 4th trip activated [E1894] sec.
after the previous one. Non Essential consumer trip
2728 Trip out 5 Output activated by the protection in the "Non essential consumer
trip" sequence. See 9.15; This is the 5th trip activated [E1894] sec.
after the previous one. Non Essential consumer trip
2774 Trip out direct Output activated by the protection in the "Non essential consumer
trip" sequence. See 9.15; This one is activated directly. Non
Essential consumer trip
2213 Smoke limiter Output to be used if external speed controller has smoke limit input.
Will activate an output upon start. In Manual mode: when GENSYS
2.0 Core start button is pressed or with a manual start request. In
Auto mode: when engine state *E2057+ is Start *2+, Warm up *3+
and Nominal speed *4+.
2214 Warm up This output will activate when engine is warming up. Will activate
an output at start. In Manu mode, when GENSYS 2.0 Core start
button is pressed or with a manual start request and while the
warm up timer [E2061] is different from 0. In Auto mode, when
engine state *E2057+ is Start *2+ and Warm up *3+.
2206 Horn Can be used for external horn or flashing light relay; output will
activate whenever a protection triggers. The output will be
activated when a generator electrical fault [E2200], mains electrical
fault [E2201], alarm [E2202], fault [E2203] or security [E2204]
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

68

triggers, and will reset when the GENSYS 2.0 Core horn button is
pressed.
Parameter E1991 can be used to select the maximum duration of
horn activation (0 means the horn will buzz until being manually
stopped).
2215 Air fans To be wired to fan relay.
2219 Generator breaker Close Can be used to close genset breaker [100 ms pulse]
2221 Generator breaker Open Can be used to open genset breaker
2220 Mains breaker Close Can be used to close mains breaker.
2222 Mains breaker Open Can be used to open mains breaker.
Generates a 100ms pulse on the output, when Generator/Mains
breaker [E2016/E2017] wants to close/open
2229 Fuel filling Can be used for an external fuel pump in conjunction with "Fuel low
level" and "Fuel high level" or "Manu fuel fill" functions attributed
to spare digital inputs.
2242 Coolant filling Can be used for a compressor in conjunction with "Coolant high
level" and "Coolant low level" or "Manual air fill" functions
attributed to spare digital inputs.
Oil filling [2245] Can be used for oil level filling in conjunction with "Oil high level"
and "Oil low level" or "Manu oil fill" functions attributed to spare
digital inputs.
2341 +f
2342 -f
2343 +U
2344


-U
The behaviour will change according to the mode. In Manual mode,
if you program the +f function, the output will be activated when
you press the GENSYS 2.0 *++ key or if there is a Manual +f request
[E2233]. Likewise for the other functions; -f activates with [-] key or
Manual f request [E2234]; -f activates with [+]+SHIFT keys or
Manual +U request *E2235+; -f activates with [-]+SHIFT keys or
Manual U request [E2236]. In Auto mode, these functions will
control a speed / voltage regulator requiring +/- contacts. You can
configure the no action range for the speed [E1598] and for the
voltage [E1599], the impulsion delay for the speed [E1600] and for
the voltage [E1601].
2223 Damper Will activate in stop sequence to stop the engine when damping flap
is fitted. Will be activated when there is an engine fault [2046].
2232 Light test This will activate the output whenever the light test key is pressed
on the front panel of GENSYS 2.0 Core, or an input programmed for
light test is active
2331 Generator ready Output will be active when start sequence is completed and voltage
is present at the generator. In Auto mode, the output will be
activated when the engine state *E2057+ is Gen ready *6+. In
Manual mode the output will be activated when the speed [E0033]
is positive.
2240 Generator stopped Output will be active when genset is at rest. In Auto mode, the
output will be activated when the engine state *E2057+ is Waiting
[0]. In Manual mode the output will be activated when there is no
speed [E0033].
2262 [ + ] key


2263 Shift & [ + ] keys


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

69

2264 [ - ] key


2265 Shift & [ - ] keys These key are useful in Manu mode to control the speed and the
voltage.
2056 Manu mode Output will be active when GENSYS 2.0 Core is in manual mode.
2267 Starter 2 Will be active when a second engine starting system is present and
programmed in Configuration -> Start sequence menu.
2268 Starter 3 Will be active when a third engine starting system is present and
programmed in Configuration -> Start sequence menu.
2269 Ana1 threshold Output will be active when the measurement of analogue input 1
[oil pressure] is under the set value; it will not de-activate until
measurement is over [set value + hysteresis value]. To be
programmed and used with the following parameters: Oil
threshold *E1175+, Oil hysteresis *E1176+.
2270 Ana2 threshold Output will be active when the measurement of analogue input 2
[water temperature] is over the set value; it will not de-activate
until measurement is under [set value minus hysteresis value]. To
be programmed and used with the following parameters, Wat
temp thresh *E1426+, Wat temp hyst. *E1427+
2271 Ana3 threshold Output will be active when the measurement of analogue input 3
[1st spare measure] is over or under the set value; it will not de-
activate until measurement is under or over [set value +/- hysteresis
value]. To choose the direction of the protection, see Configuration
-> engine/battery settings [SS measure 1 min or max thresh.].
To be programmed and used with the following parameters: Meas
1 thresh. *E1428+, Meas 1 hyst. *E1429+.
2272 Ana4 threshold Output will be active when the measurement of analogue input 4
[2nd spare measure] is over or under the set value; it will not de-
activate until measurement is under or over [set value +/- hysteresis
value]. To choose the direction of the protection, see Configuration
-> engine/battery settings [SS measure 2 min or max thresh.].
To be programmed and used with the following parameters: Meas
2 thresh. *E1430+ and Meas 2 hyst. *E1431+.
2525 Available in Auto Will activate when the genset has completed its start sequence in
auto mode - can be used for external logic. The output will be
activated when GENSYS 2.0 Core is in Auto mode and the power
state [E2071] is not in fault [40, 100 or 255].
2767 Heavy consumer
authorization
Output activated when heavy consumer starting is allowed in the
"Heavy consumer control" sequence. See below, 9.14
5000 Unload brker 1 Order output to close generator breaker n1 upon start if the
nominal power<E4001
5001 Unload brker 2 Order output to close generator breaker n1 upon start if the
nominal power<E4002
5002 Unload brker 3 Order output to close generator breaker n1 upon start if the
nominal power<E4003
5003 Unload brker 4 Order output to close generator breaker n1 upon start if the
nominal power<E4004
5004 Unload brker 5 Order output to close generator breaker n1 upon start if the
nominal power<E4005



GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

70

7.2.2 Polarity
For each of the five outputs, two options are possible:
NE: normally energized; the output will de-energize when required, according to its function.
ND: normally de-energized; the output will energize when required.

7.3 Analogue input
7.3.1 Oil pressure configuration
You can define oil pressure measurement parameters through the menu. Go to configuration menu:
Enhanced configuration/Analog inputs.
You can now choose units (mBar, Bar, kPa, PSI) and degree of accuracy (number of digits after decimal point):
1
0.1
0.01
0.001

7.3.2 Water temperature configuration
You can define water temperature measurement parameters through the menu. Go to configuration
menu: Enhanced configuration/Analog inputs
You can now choose units (C or F) and degree of accuracy (number of digits after decimal point):
1
0.1
0.01
0.001

7.3.3 Configuration of engine measurements 1 and 2
Spare Analogue measurements 1 and 2: they can be named, and the unit to be displayed chosen among
the following:
No unit, V, kV, mA, A, kA, Hz, kW, kWh, kVAR, kVARh, rpm, %, Bar, mBar, kPa, PSI, , C, F, L, Gal, s, h, days,
Hz/s, m3/h, L/h, Gal/h.
You can then choose the degree of accuracy (number of digits after decimal point):
1
0.1
0.01
0.001

7.3.4 Calibration of analogue inputs
1/ Oil and water 0-400 Ohms sensors
Oil Pressure and Water Temp: this menu relates to the dedicated analogue inputs (oil pressure and coolant
temperature). Please enter the pressure or temperature read by your sensors according to the resistance
shown in the table.
Oil Temperature calibration points are [E1188 to E1198], which correspond to 0 to 400 Ohms
Water Temp calibration points are [E1199 to E1209], which correspond to 0 to 400 Ohms.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

71

Please enter calibration points using this table:

Ohm VDO 5b VDO 10b VDO 25b AC 10b Veglia 8b Veglia 12b Dat 10b
0 -345 -487 -2 120 -260 8 442 12663 12142
40 834 1 585 3 777 4 316 6 922 10387 8962
80 2 014 3 945 9 674 8 892 5 402 8111 6102
120 3 193 6 245 15 571 13 468 3 882 5835 3562
160 4 372 9 050 21 469 18 044 2 362 3559 1342
200 5 552 12 220 27 366 20 000 842 1283 -558
240 6 731 20 000 30 000 20 000 -678 -993 0
280 7 911 20 000 30 000 20 000 0 0 0
320 9 090 20 000 30 000 20 000 0 0 0
360 10 270 20 000 30 000 20 000 0 0 0
400 11 449 20 000 30 000 20 000 0 0 0
Table 23: Oil pressure calibration points

Ohm VDO 120 VDO 150 Veglia Datcon L Datcon H AC
0 145 1000 1000 1000 0 1000
40 96 119 140 104 40 104
80 74 94 118 78 80 78
120 63 80 105 63 120 63
160 55 70 96 52 160 52
200 49 62 89 43 200 43
240 44 56 83 36 240 36
280 40 51 78 31 280 31
320 37 46 74 26 320 26
360 34 42 70 21 360 21
400 32 38 67 17 400 17
Table 24: Water Temp calibration points

2/ Engine measurements 1 and 2
Spare 1 engine measure calibration points are [E1210 to E1220].
Spare 1 engine measure impedance points are [E1188 to E1198].
Spare 2 engine measure calibration points are [E1232 to E1242].
Spare 2 engine measure impedance points are [E1199 to E1209].

For each of the two spare sensors, this table shows the given value (left side) for each of ten sampled
resistive values in ohms (right side). Intermediate values are obtained with linear approximation.
E. g.: min = 3000, max =6000, gives the values corresponding to 3000, 3300, 3600, 3900, 4200, 4500,
4800,..., 5700, 6000 Ohms. These can be used in equations or displayed.

7.3.5 Use spare analogue input as digital input
If necessary, it is possible to use an analogue input as a digital input.
1/ Purpose
Use spare analogue input (spare 1 and 2, connections F1-F2 and F3-F4) as digital input.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

72

2/ Configuration
Spare analogue input calibration table should be set as shown below to mimic digital input.

3/ Parameters
Calibration table for a normally closed input:
V1210 0 N Spare1 calib1 -32768 +32767
V1211 1 N Spare1 calib2 -32768 +32767
V1212 1 N Spare1 calib3 -32768 +32767
V1213 1 N Spare1 calib4 -32768 +32767
V1214 1 N Spare1 calib5 -32768 +32767
V1215 1 N Spare1 calib6 -32768 +32767
V1216 1 N Spare1 calib7 -32768 +32767
V1217 1 N Spare1 calib8 -32768 +32767
V1218 1 N Spare1 calib9 -32768 +32767
V1219 1 N Spare1 calib10 -32768 +32767
V1220 1 N Spare1 calib11 -32768 +32767

V1221 0 N Spare1 res1 +00000 +10000
V1222 1000 N Spare1 res2 +00000 +65535
V1223 2000 N Spare1 res3 +00000 +65535
V1224 3000 N Spare1 res4 +00000 +65535
V1225 4000 N Spare1 res5 +00000 +65535
V1226 5000 N Spare1 res6 +00000 +65535
V1227 6000 N Spare1 res7 +00000 +65535
V1228 7000 N Spare1 res8 +00000 +65535
V1229 8000 N Spare1 res9 +00000 +65535
V1230 9000 N Spare1 res10 +00000 +65535
V1231 10000 N Spare1 res11 +00000 +10000

For Normally closed or normally opened inputs wiring will be similar, only the software requires
modification.
Then enter these equations to switch to virtual input:
GENSYS 2.0 Core
F1 F2
-BAT
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

I
/
O

l
i
n
e
s

73


@*********************************;
@analog input to DI/spare 1 ;
@*********************************;
@E0031 analog input spare 1;
@E2283 virtual input 1 ;
@*********************************;
E2283:= E0031 ;

Calibration table is similar for a normally opened input; you need only change the
equations:
@*********************************;
@ Analog input in numeric/spare 1 ;
@*********************************;
@E0031 analog input spare 1;
@E2283 virtual input 1;
@*********************************;
E2283:= !E0031 ;

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
s

74

8 Protections
Protections are triggered by different events (digital inputs, and logic sequences). They take action to protect a
process, engine or alternator.
When configured, they can take the actions listed hereunder.

8.1 Disable
This gives no effect.
8.2 Generator electrical fault
This action triggers a Generator electrical fault. Protection will open genset breaker and try to synchronize
again. Number of attempts can be configured.
8.3 Mains electrical fault
This action triggers a Mains electrical fault. Protection will open mains breaker and try to synchronize
again. Number of attempts can be configured.
8.4 Alarm
This action triggers an Alarm.
8.5 Fault (Soft Shut down)
This action triggers a Soft shutdown. Genset breaker will open allowing the engine to cool down off load
for the duration of the cool down timer. The engine is then stopped.
8.6 Security (Hard Shutdown)
This action triggers a Hard shutdown. Genset breaker will open and engine will be stopped immediately
without cooling down.
8.7 Help + Fault (Soft Shut down)
This action triggers a Soft shutdown with Help call. Before the soft shutdown sequence, GENSYS 2.0
Core will call another genset onto load via the inter-GENSYS CAN bus. When the helping set is connected to
the busbar (and not before!) GENSYS 2.0 Core will open the genset breaker, allowing the engine to cool
down off load, for the duration of the cool down timer. The engine is then stopped.
8.8 Help + Gen. Electrical fault
This action triggers a Generator electrical fault with Help call. Breaker(s) to be opened can be
configured (genset breaker or mains breaker).
Before opening the corresponding breaker, GENSYS 2.0 Core will call another genset onto load via the
inter-GENSYS CAN bus. When the helping set is connected to the busbar (and not before!) GENSYS 2.0 Core
will open the corresponding breaker and try to synchronize again. The number of attempts can be
configured.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

75

9 Additional functions
9.1 Load sharing using integral (de-drooping)
9.1.1 Introduction
This function is for generators in island mode (no mains),
It allows perfect load sharing at the right frequency even if the generators are not the same.
When several generators are on the bus bar, one takes a central role with a fixed frequency of 50Hz. The other
generators determine load sharing using an integral so that each one has a perfect share.
The set point of the central frequency is the parameter E1080 (or E1081 if selected).
When the GENSYS 2.0 Core starts, one genset is elected to be the master (the first one on the bus). The master
determines the central frequency and load sharing is without an integral. The other gensets determine the
load sharing with an integral, but without using the central frequency.
When you are in state E2071=29 (several generators paralleled with mains), the central frequency is
disabled.

9.1.2 Procedure
1. In manual mode, using [+] and [-], adjust the speed control output (G9-G11) to obtain the
desired frequency +/-2Hz from each genset. (see paragraph 6.1)
2. Test that load sharing is working properly (default values inhibit the integral).
3. Activation of central frequency with genset 1:
On the front panel of the GENSYS 2.0 Core (or on the PC)
Choose menu: Configuration/modification by variable number, and set E1476 to 2.
Choose menu: Configuration/Active power regulation:
-KW sharing GPI
-G = 50 %( E1102)
-P = 5 %( E1900)
-I = 2 %(E1901)
- Central Hz gain
-G = 25% (E1902)
4. Adjust genset speed to give 49Hz using the speed governor (GENSYS 2.0 Core in manual mode
without load).
5. Switch to TEST mode. When the breaker is closed frequency should return to 50.00Hz within 5
seconds. Adjust the Hz central gain (E1902) to adjust the time if needed.
6. Repeat step 5 for all gensets.
7. Test the load sharing by changing the nominal frequency of one generator to 49Hz.

-> bus frequency should remain at 50 Hz and kW load sharing within 2% of that desired. The stability of
load sharing is adjusted with kW sharing GPI / I (E1901)

Remarks:
E1902 = stability of de-drooping (only activated in the master GENSYS 2.0 Core). Adjust to recover
1Hz within 5 sec.
E1476 = 0 Inhibition of central frequency.
E1476 = with a high value, response time will be slower (recommended default value =2)
E1901 = Load sharing integral, is only active on the slave GENSYS 2.0 Core units.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

76

E1102 = Global gain of load sharing is obtained by multiplying the PI and the central Hz gain.
E2739 = 1 I am the master (I control the frequency).
E2739 = 0 I am a slave (I share load using the integral)

9.1.3 GCR synchronization & mains paralleling
When using the central frequency (de-drooping) function and paralleling with the mains using an analogue
bus, the central frequency has to be inhibited during synchronization. The following equations should be
added in level 1 or 2 if the synchronization bus is used (terminal 42 of GCR, terminals G1 & G3 of GENSYS 2.0):
@ ******************************************************;
@ digital input 1(E2006) is closed during mains synchronization;
@ mains breaker feedback is connected to terminal J1 ;
@ Dont forget to allow parameter E1476 and E1020 to be ;
@ modifiable by modbus and equations ;
@*******************************************************;
TEST (E2006 EQ 1) AND (E2000 EQ 0) EQ 1 THEN
BLOC
E1476:=0;
E1020:=20000
BEND
ELSE
BLOC
E1476:=2;
E1020:=0
BEND
TEND;

9.1.4 Integral inhibition
To disable this type of load sharing and return to the old type, apply the Disable value from the table
below.
The variables involved in the new type of load sharing are:
Variable
number
Label Description Default
value
Disable
value
V1102 Load sharing G Parameter to set the Global gain. 50 50
V1900 Load sharing P Parameter to set the Proportional gain. 5 1
V1901 Load sharing I Parameter to set the Integral gain. 2 0
V1902 Hz centre gain Parameter to control the central frequency, acting
as a frequency standard
25 0
V1476 XXXXXX 2 0

Warning:
When the CAN bus is not used, you have to disable load sharing (see table above).
In the case of a CAN bus failure where E1259 is not set at 6 (load sharing in droop disabled), you
also have to disable load sharing.


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

77

9.2 Operator controlled return to mains
9.2.1 Explanation
Normal operation: In the case of mains failure, the engine starts and takes the load. When the mains voltage
returns, the engine resynchronizes with the mains and automatically gives back the load.
The Operator controlled return to mains special function (set with the parameter E1620 = 1) allows the
operator to control the moment the engine will return the load to the mains.
The GENSYS 2.0 Core waits for E2584 = 1 (Virtual input 40) before re-synchronizing the engine to the mains.

9.2.2 How to set this function
The E1620 variable must be set to 1.
The Virtual Input 40 must be set as used by equations (E1699=1)
This virtual input can be associated to:
a digital input: Ex: E2584= E2006;
a CANopen deported digital input: Ex: E2584= E0158;
an equation result: E2584= (E2440 GT 1000) AND (E2006 EQ 1)

9.2.3 Summary
E1620 = 1.
E2584 = Virtual Input 40 to allow the genset to return the load to the mains.
E1699 = 1: (E2584 (VI 40) is "used by equations")

9.2.4 Parameters used
E1620 Inhibition of Variable 13= Operator return to Mains ( + E2584)
E2584 Virtual input Spare 40
E1699 Virtual Input 40 associated function.

9.3 Mains & Generator electrical fault options
Mains electrical fault management
Parameters (default value in bold):

E1846: Open breaker: selects the breaker that will be opened upon a "Mains electrical fault". Choose
between the "Mains" breaker or the "Generator" breaker or "both".
E1841: Fault start: allows the engine to start upon a "Mains electrical fault". You can select "Yes" to start
the engine or "No".
E1840: Start delay (0.0): is the delay between the "Mains electrical fault" and the engine start. It will delay
a digital or virtual input. In the case of an internal detection, this delay bypasses the delay of the
protection.
E1842: No load delay (60.0): is the time for which the engine runs without load when the generator
breaker is opened. If the delay is 0, the generator will never stop.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

78

9.3.1 Default configuration
Diagram of behaviour in change over mode and in mains paralleling mode.

Mains CB
E2000
Mains electrical
fault E2201
Voltage bus
presence E2054
Configuration : Change over with one digi tal input programmed
in "Mains electrical fault"
Production
request E2072
Mains back timer
WhenStart on Mains electrical fault is Yes
Timer bef ore st art on
Mains electrical fault
Gener ator CB
E2001
Start sequence

Figure 33 - Change over with one digital input programmed as "Mains electrical fault"


Mains CB
E2000
Mains electrical
fault E2201
Bus voltage
presence E2054
Configuration : permanent mains paralleling with one digital
input programmed in "Mains electrical fault"
Mains back
timer
Breaker openned on Mains electrical fault is Mains
Production
request E2072
Start on Mains electrical fault is Yes
Generator CB
E2001
Synchronization

Figure 34 - Permanent mains paralleling with one digital input programmed as "Mains electrical
fault"

9.3.2 Start on fault and open generator on fault
This parameter is useful in permanent mains paralleling mode with "open generator breaker on mains
failure". It can be used if the generator nominal power is not high enough to take the load in island mode.
In this case, the generator will provide power, but if there is a mains failure the generator will not take the
load alone, and opens its breaker.
In case the setup of the unit does not generate an engine start upon mains failure, it will run with no load
and stop after a preset time (E1842).
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

79

Confi guration : permanent mai ns paral leli ng with one di gi tal
input programmed i n "Mai ns el ectrical fault"
Breaker openned on Mains electrical fault is Generator
Start on Mains electrical fault is No
Mains CB
E2000
Mains electrical
fault E2201
Bus voltage
presence E2054
Mains bac k
timer
Production
request E2072
No load
running timer
Mains bac k timer
Remote start is always On
Generator CB
E2001
Synchr onization

Figure 35 - Permanent mains paralleling with one digital input programmed as "Mains electrical
fault"

Mains CB
E2000
Mains electrical
fault E2201
Bus voltage
presence E2054
Confi gurati on : permanent mains paral leli ng with one digital
input programmed in "Mains electri cal fault"
Mains back
timer
Production
request E2072
Breaker openned on Mains electrical fault is Generator
Start on Mains electrical fault is Yes
No load
running timer
Mains back timer
Generator CB
E2001
Synchr onization

Figure 36 - Permanent mains paralleling with one input as "Mains electrical fault"






NOTE:
Never use No start on fault in conjunction with "open mains on fault" in permanent mode or
no break change over mode.
Always use No start on fault when "generator breaker" or "both breakers" to open is selected.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

80

9.4 Generator electrical fault
Parameters (default value in bold):
E1843: TM re-synch. (30.0): the delay before the generator tries to re-synchronize with the Mains after a
"Generator electrical fault".
E1844: Nb re-synch. (3): number of attempts to re-synchronize.
In the case of a generator electrical fault, the generator breaker is opened and the GENSYS 2.0 is in state 40. In
this state, the alternator is de-excited (if wired) during a timer (E1265). After this timer, if the fault is still
present, there is a hard shutdown. Otherwise GENSYS 2.0 Core will try to re-synchronize.

Figure 37 - Permanent mains paralleling and generator electrical fault

9.5 GENSYS 2.0 Core with external automatic start module
9.5.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to interface the GENSYS 2.0 Core with an engine which has got its own
automatic start module. The start sequence is redundant in the system. The following diagram shows the
main functions of each device:


Figure 38 - Wiring GENSYS 2.0 Core Auto Start Module


M

Engine
Auto Start
Module

Start sequence
Engine
protections

GENSYS 2.0 Core

Synchronisation
Electrical
protections
GE breaker
control
PF control
kW control
Monitoring
AVR


Start request
Engine fault
Engine alarm
Generator ready
3*U 3*I
Mains/Bus voltage
Remote start
Governor


Oil pressure
Water temp
Pickup

Crank
0 1 0 1 2
Generator CB
E2001
Generator electrical
fault E2200
Paralleled Fault Sync Paralleled Paralleled Paralleled Paralleled Fault Fault Fault Fault Sync Sync Sync Stop
Power state
E2071
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

81

Signal description Direction Auto Start Module (ASM) GENSYS 2.0
Start request GENSYS 2.0->ASM Remote start input C5
Genset ready (opt) ASM->GENSYS 2.0 Core Digital output J15
Engine Alarm ASM->GENSYS 2.0 Core Digital output J7
Engine Fault ASM->GENSYS 2.0 Core Digital output J6
Table 25 - Wiring GENSYS 2.0 Core Auto Start Module


GENSYS 2.0 Core does not need oil pressure and water temp digital inputs. This table is shown as an
example only and can be customized as needed.

9.6 Remote start upon external pulse
To set the GENSYS 2.0 Core to start upon an external pulse input, 2 solutions can be used:
Use a relay
Set an external input

9.6.1 Setting external input
This variable E2514 (Virtual Start) must be maintained at 1 after the first rising edge and go to 0
after the second rising edge.
Example is for the J15 input:
@ WARNING: if section empty or missing, existing equations will be lost;
PROG 1
BLOC

@@@@ PULSE ON REMOTE START FROM EXTERNAL @@@@;
@ E2585 = Value of the E2815 with one cycle less to detect a pulse;
@ ( E2815 EQ 1) AND (E2585 EQ 0) Detection of a top pulse;
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@;
E2585:= E2815;
E2514:=((E2514 OR ((E2815 EQ 1) AND (E2585 EQ 0))) AND ((E2514 AND ((E2815 EQ 1) AND
(E2585 EQ 0))) EQ 0))
BEND
.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

82

Do not forget to set the input. GENSYS 2.0 Core must be informed that J15 (in this example) is used by a
custom equation:
V1276 1 N DIJ15 function +00000 +02999
Here the variable E2585 detects a rising edge on E2815.
The cycle or the variable E2815 goes from 0 to 1. The variable E2585 stays at 0 a cycle longer in order to see
E2815 =1 and detect the rising edge.
You can also detect the falling edge by changing the equation:
(E2815 EQ 1) AND (E2585 EQ 0) to (E2815 EQ 0) AND (E2585 EQ 1).

9.7 Safety Inhibitions
9.7.1 Objective
Safety inhibitions are mandatory on certain types of application, particularly in safety generators used in
public spaces (norm NF E 37-312).
The aim is to inhibit the oil pressure and water temperature safeties on the GENSYS 2.0 Core. Thus, in the
case of a fault, the generator remains in operation. Other protections (over speed, overload, etc...) are still
active if set.

9.7.2 Configuration
1/ Hardware:
Contacts for oil pressure and water temperature are no longer connected to J4 and J5 but to spare
configurable inputs.
In this example, the oil pressure and water temperature contacts are on J13 and J14.
2/ Software:
The following equations must be downloaded to level 1 or 2 (as described in ):
BLOC

@***************************************************************;
@ Oil pressure and water temp Inhibition ;
@***************************************************************;
@E2811 Logical Input J11 GENSYS 2.0 inhibit security ;
@E2812 spare input 8 J12 oil pressure ;
@E2813 spare input 9 J13 is water temperature ;
@E1273 fct spare input J12 ;
@E1274 fct spare input J13 ;
@E0033 speed ;
@E1712 user param: start speed ;
@E1714 user param: stop speed ;
@E1456 Oil pressure sign ;
@E1457 Water temp sign ;
@E2283 Virtual input 1 alarms inhibition ;
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

83

@***************************************************************;

TEST E2011 EQ 1 THEN
BLOC
E1457:=0;
E2283:=1;
E1274:=2208;
TEST E0033 GT E1712 THEN E1456:=0
ELIF E0033 LE E1714 THEN E1456:=1
TEND;
E1273:=2208
BEND
ELSE
BLOC
E1456:=E2812;
E1457:=!E2813;
E2283:=0;
E1273:=1;
E1274:=1
BEND
TEND
BEND

9.8 Use of BSM II with GENSYS 2.0 Core
When you have a lot of analogue values to monitor, BSM II can be connected to GENSYS 2.0 Core to log
measurements and process data efficiently. This chapter will explain this type of configuration.

9.8.1 Schematic

Figure 39 Wiring GENSYS 2.0 Core to BSM II

Note 1: An A40W2 cable (a CRE technology product) is recommended to connect GENSYS 2.0 Core to BSM
II. Connect CAN H (terminal 5) of BSM II to the Blue/white striped wire and connect CAN L(terminal 7) of
BSM II to White/Blue striped wire.
Note 2: If BSM II is at the end of the CAN bus, add one 120 resistor in parallel with terminals 5 and 7.
A40W6
GENSYS 2.0
Core
CAN2 (COM3)
120 Ohms
active if end
of bus
BSMII
5 CANH ; 7 CAN
L + R 120 Ohms
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

84

9.8.2 Configuration
The communication between GENSYS 2.0 Core and BSM II uses a CANopen protocol. BSM II is a slave unit and
GENSYS 2.0 a master unit.
GENSYS 2.0 Core can be connected to several devices via its COM2: BSM II (Max 2), Wago coupler (Max 32).
Only one of the two BSM II must be set to log data from GENSYS 2.0 Core (limited by the number of messages
sent from GENSYS 2.0 Core).

9.8.3 Procedure example
This example allows you to log the most significant variables of your application when an alarm occurs.
See also the application note A43Z090100A to configure the BSM II logging.
Download the text file (level 1 equation) Z090211a_1.txt to the GENSYS 2.0 as described in
Download the text file (level 1 equation) A43Z090100a_1.txt to the BSM II.
Archiving of data begins immediately.
Variables are stored in the BSM II at the rate of 1 sample per second when an alarm occurs:
-5 samples before the alarm
-1 sample when alarm occurs
-5 samples after the alarm
See the application note A43Z090100A to retrieve archives from the BSM II.

Note 1: With this configuration, the BSM II node ID is equal to 1. Make sure that no other device on the
CAN bus has the same node ID.
Note 2: Variable transmitted

AO Var. AO Var. AO Var. AO Var. AO Var. AO Var.
1
Alarm
E0516
5
kW GE
E0018
9
V1
E0000
13
I2
E0007
17
kW3
E0011
21 Free
2
kW
mains
E0036
6
Hz GE
E0020
10
V2
E0001
14
I3
E0008
18
PwrMngt
Status
E2071
22 Free
3
Hz
mains
E0023
7
cos GE
E0021
11
V3
E0002
15
kW1
E0009
19
Engine
Status
E2057
23 Free
4
U13
mains
E0022
8
Sum
Digital
12
I1
E0006
16
kW2
E0010
20 free 24 Free
Sum Digital = each bit of this parameter represents a logic variable.
Bit0 = breaker in mains (E2000)
Bit1 = breaker in GE (E2001)
Bit2 Bit14: free
Bit15: forbidden (this bit gives the result a bad negative value)

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

85

9.8.4 Custom procedure
This procedure shows you how to customize equations to send your own variables to the BSM II.
See also the application note A43Z090101A to customize the BSM II archiving.
Download the text file (level 1 equation) Z090211a_1.txt to the GENSYS 2.0 Core as described in
Download the text file (level 1 equation) A43Z090100a_1.txt to the BSM II.
Customisation: see notes below.
Note1: Change the Node ID of BSM II
See BSM II user's manual to choose the node ID in the BSM II.
Then change this Node ID in the settings of the GENSYS 2.0 Core (default ID equal 1):
-Go to CANopen menu: configuration / << / CANopen
-In each input/output message used, change "Mod. ID" to the correct value.

Note2: Delete message
If you do not need to send all variables set in default equations, you can delete output messages.
Go to CANopen menu: configuration / << / CANopen / Output message
Change Typ. Out mess to UNUSED to remove the message
Change Mod. ID to 0

Note3: Add message
Each message sends a maximum of 4 Analogue values to BSM II.
Go to CANopen menu: configuration / << / CANopen / Output message
Set "Mod. ID" to the correct Node ID of the BSM II.
Set Typ. Out mess to ANALOG
Set Nb of Outputs (Max 4)
Add equation described in Note 4 (below)

Note 4: Customize the variables sent to BSM II
All variables are transferred as analogue outputs from GENSYS 2.0 Core to BSM II.
Analogue output GENSYS 2.0 Variable
AO1 AO8 E2432 E2439
AO9 AO16 E2682 E2689
AO17 AO32 E2708 E2723
All variables are transferred as analogue inputs from BSM II to GENSYS 2.0.
Analogue input GENSYS 2.0 Variable
AI1 AI44 E0285 E0328
To transfer a variable from GENSYS 2.0 Core to BSM II, write the equation below in level 1:
Example:
This example copies the KW measurement (E0018) to Analog Output 1 (E2432).
@ Allocate AO1 (E2432) to the measure of kW (E0018)
E2432:=E0018;
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

86

Transfer several digital variables (max 15) via one analogue output. Each bit of the AO is equal to a digital
variable.
Example:
@ allocate AO8 to digital outputs
@Breaker mains(b6) + 6 Digital Outputs(DO6=b5 -> DO1=b0);
E2439:= 0;
E2439:= X2439 + (64*E2000) + (32*E2445) + (16*E2444) + (8*E2443) + (4*E2442) + (2*E2441) + E2440;

Note: In the PLC equation, variables are considered as signed integers. This means that bit 31 is the sign
and cannot be used.

9.9 GENSYS 2.0 Core with TEM compact
This chapter describes how to interface the GENSYS 2.0 Core with the TEM compact from Deutz Engines.
The association of the TEM and the GENSYS 2.0 Core is an excellent solution to parallel a generator set with
a Deutz Engine prime mover.

9.9.1 Overview:
Some functions are redundant: the kW regulation and the start sequence. The following diagram shows the
main function of each device:

Figure 40 - Wiring GENSYS 2.0 Core TEM







M

Deutz gas
engine
TEM

Start sequence
Engine
protections
KW control
Gas protections

GENSYS 2.0 Core

Synchronisation
Electrical
protections
kW measurement
GE breaker control
PF control
Remote
I/O

2* 0-
20mA
outputs

AVR


Start request
Engine fault
Engine alarmt
Generator ready
-Hz
+ Hz

Actual
kW
kW
demand
Can
Open
3*U 3*I
Mains voltage
Remote start
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

87

Signal
description
Remark Direction TEM
Compact
GENSYS 2.0
Core / Wago
Start request used only if the kW set
point is in the TEM
GENSYS 2.0 Core ->TEM X141-4
X142-4
C5
kW demand
0-20mA
Used to start/stop and
to fix the kW set point.
GENSYS 2.0 Core /Wago
->TEM
Wago output 2
Genset ready TEM->GENSYS 2.0 Core X31-5
X31-6
J15
TEM Alarm Relay TEM->GENSYS 2.0 Core X31-1
X31-2
J7
TEM Fault Relay TEM->GENSYS 2.0 Core X31-3
X31-4
J6
+ Hz Digital signal GENSYS 2.0 Core ->TEM X141-6
X142-6
C1
- Hz Digital signal GENSYS 2.0 Core ->TEM X141-7
X142-7
C2
Pickup G7 G8
Analog AVR
signal
AVR=MX321 GENSYS 2.0 Core ->AVR H2 H4
Actual kW
0-20mA
GENSYS 2.0 Core -> TEM Wago output 1
Table 26 - Wiring GENSYS 2.0 Core TEM

Note: this wiring diagram is only an example; you can use a different wiring setup if necessary.

The following text file is the text file of an application tested on site:

Power plant (example):
One single genset in parallel with mains in base load mode.
No emergency start.
Manual breaker on the mains side.
Motorized breaker on generator side.
Generator set:
Engine:
DEUTZ TBG 616V12K,
450/525kW 1800RPM.
TEM COMPACT engine management system
Generator:
Newage/Stanford 1800RPM,
480/277V, 910kVA
AVR MX321
Power management:
GENSYS 1.0 (CRE technology), Soft V1.25
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

88

Remote analog I/O 0-20mA (Wago)

Copy the downloadable text file from the website and paste it in a new text only file. You can download it to a
GENSYS 2.0 Core as a starting point before commissioning. This file is only a guide and is not enough to start a
new application.

9.10 Presetting counters / G59 parameters (Access level -1)
Access to these specific features is done using a special password:
1. First connect with password level 2 CREProd .
- Go in menu System/Passwords/Level-1 password.
- Set parameter E1610 to the desired feature you want to access (G59 or Meter preset).
- Validate and save your settings by pressing [SHIFT] + [ i ].
2. Go back to the login page (press 3 times on ESC).
- Enter password CustMenu .
- Now you can access to the special features you have selected.

Presetting meters
With this option you can set or reset all the counters.
Dont forget to save the new settings by pressing key [SHIFT] + [ i ] at the same time.
G59 option
G59 is a protection norm widely used in the UK. You can set and lock the following protections:
Mains Under / Over frequency.
Mains Under / Over voltage.
Vector surge.
ROCOF (df/dt).
When the protections are locked, thresholds, timers and controls are also locked.
Dont forget to save the new settings by pressing key [SHIFT] + [ i ] at the same time.

9.11 Scada
GENSYS 2.0 Core communication uses industrial standards. This product is versatile, and can be used with
Modbus, for example to be controlled by a SCADA system.
CRE Technology offers different solutions for such applications (remote display, remote control, event and
alarm management ). Contact us for more information.





GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

89

9.12 How to set a GPID
9.12.1 Principle
A GPID allows the control of any system in a simple way. Figure 51 shows a typical GPID.



Figure 41 - Typical GPID controller

The G parameter acts as sensitivity adjustment for the other parameters.
The P parameter adjusts the rise time (time needed for the system to reach its set point for the first time).
By increasing P, the rise time will decrease. However, overshoot will increase and may also render the
system unstable (fast hunting). Using only the P factor will always leave a difference between the set point
and the actual value (this difference is also called droop).
The I parameter reduces the difference between the set point and the actual value. By increasing I, the rise
time will decrease. However, overshoot will increase and may also render the system unstable (slow
hunting).
The D parameter increases the stability and minimizes the overshoot phenomena. By increasing D,
overshoot will decrease but the system may still be unstable, particularly if the measured signal is
disturbed (sensor signal not filtered).

9.12.2 Empirical setting method
First set G to 50%.
Set the parameters P, I and D to zero.
Increase the value of P until the system becomes unstable. From this position, decrease the value of P to
60% of the previous value.
Set I in the same way.
Increase D if the system is unstable upon fast load variation.
If stability cannot be achieved, restart the settings and reduce (system unstable) or increase (system too
slow) G.


G
P
I
D
Measure
Set point
+
-
Deviation
G: global gain
P: proportional gain
I: integral gain
D: derivative gain

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

90

9.13 Automatic load / unload
This function automatically controls the start and stopping of several generators of a power plant depending
on the load request, whether paralleling with the mains or not. Coordination with the other GENSYS 2.0 Core
units is via the CAN bus (COM1).
Required configuration to allow automatic load / unload:
All the remote start inputs must be on, on each GENSYS 2.0 Core (connected to 0V).
At least 2 generators must have GENSYS 2.0 Core units.
If remote start is off, the generator never starts.
A generator can run in "Forced running" mode using a digital input. Select a digital input with the function
"Priority generator". Activate this input. The generator starts, synchronizes, closes its breaker and stays on the
bus bar until "Remote start/stop" is de-activated.
If there are no generators in "Forced running" mode, the priority generator with "remote start" always starts
and closes its breaker on the bus bar, even if there is no load.
When all generators are stopped and have "remote start" activated, upon start-up the "Forced running""
generators stay on the bus bar while the others coordinate stopping one by one.

How to determine the priority generator (which starts/stops) by using the variable "Load/Unl. mode"
(E1258):
Load/Unload mode [E1258] can be:
Inhibited: [0]; the different GENSYS 2.0 Core units installed on the power plant do not interact to start
or stop gensets according to the load demand.
Digital Input: [1]; if selected on all the GENSYS 2.0 Core units installed on the power plant, the
automatic start/stop sequence will be done by the genset number, which is defined in the power plant
overview.
If a digital or virtual digital input of one GENSYS 2.0 Core is set as priority generator, this GENSYS 2.0
Core will start first. The next to start will be decided by increasing genset number, which is defined in
the power plant overview settings menu. (E.g. if genset 2 has priority, then genset 3 will be the next to
be started upon increasing load, then genset 4; by decreasing load demand, genset 4 will be stopped
first, then genset 3...).
Hours run: [2] the genset to start/stop will automatically be selected according to the GENSYS 2.0 Core
hour meter. On increasing load demand, the next genset to be started is the one with fewest hours
run; on decreasing load demand, the next genset to be stopped is the one with highest hours run.
Custom E16: [3] the genset start/stop sequence will follow the priority number set in each GENSYS 2.0
Core in the variable [E1617]. Please refer to the application note: A40Z090240.

Figure 42 Automatic load/unload sequence
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

91

Load threshold [E1256]: Percentage of the genset nominal power (defined in the power plant overview
settings menu) at which GENSYS 2.0 Core will ask another genset to start and share the load after the
following timer.
TM before load [E1257]: Timer for load sharing request.
Unload dep stp. [E1914]: Used to select the "unload dependant stop" sequence. Please refer to the
application note: A40Z090227.

GENSYS 2.0 Core calculates the power that will remain on the bus bar (in % for each engine remaining) if it
decides to stop (and open its breaker). If this percentage is under the required threshold (E1915), then
GENSYS 2.0 Core will stop. If not it will wait until threshold is reached.
Unload thresh. [E1254]: Only used if E1914 is set as NO: load dependent stop not used. It is the percentage of
the genset nominal power (defined in the power plant overview settings menu) at which GENSYS 2.0 Core will
ask a genset to stop sharing the load after the following timer.
Unload dp. thrs [E1915]: Only used if the E1914 is set as YES: load dependent is used. GENSYS 2.0 Core
calculates the power that will remain on the bus bar if it decides to stop. This is the threshold below which
GENSYS 2.0 Core decides to stop. It is a percentage of the genset nominal power (defined in the power plant
overview).
TM bef. unload [E1255]: Timer used before deciding to reduce the number of gensets in load/unload
management.

Note:
To force the start of a generator in load / unload mode, during commissioning for example, remote start
and digital input (in "Priority generator" mode) must be activated.

In "Hour run" mode, if a generator starts and goes past the hours run by a generator which is stopped, the
first one does not immediately stop and the second one immediately start. Coordination between
generators is activated only during a load or unload request, i.e. in the next start/stop on load request.
During a load request, only the stopped and available generators coordinate (auto mode selected; no hard
fault).
During an unload request, only the started generators coordinate.
GENSYS 2.0 Core units in manual mode do not take part in start or load sequence.


Figure 43 - Automatic load/unload arbitration



1 2
3
4
3
Genset 3 is in forced RUN -> Genset 4 will start
first, and stop last upon load change
ARBITRATION ORDER
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

92

9.14 Heavy consumer (marine sequence)
9.14.1 Introduction
This function is used in Marine applications. Note that GENSYS 2.0 Core includes this function but does not
have any type approval. Please contact your distributor if you need a Marine approved product.

Certain external parameters must be analysed by the GENSYS 2.0 Core units before accepting heavy consumer
load.

If Power Plant can accept load, each GENSYS 2.0 Core accepts load.
If Power Plant cannot accept load, another engine is started.
Analysis of available kW, number of generators on Busbar, or both.
One input for each GENSYS 2.0 Core is used to start analysis of power available on plant.
One output for each GENSYS 2.0 Core is used to accept heavy Consumer request.

9.14.2 Menu Settings
Heavy consumer [E1911]: Power necessary for the heavy consumer.
Min number of genset [E1912]: Minimum number of engines in case of heavy consumer request.
CT Heavy [E1913]: You can choose between:

Disable [0]: Heavy consumer function is not used (default).
KWatt [1]: GENSYS 2.0 Core analyzes acceptable load on the Power plant. Engines start if necessary
Min Number [2]: Minimum number of Engines necessary on the power plant for heavy consumer.
KWatt & Min number [3]: Analysis of both the power available and minimum number necessary.
Examples that use Heavy Consumer Control: Using of a crane in a harbour, manoeuvring a ship in/out of
harbour using bow thrusters, etc ..

9.14.3 Procedure
To set the Heavy Consumer Control mode, go to the "Enhanced Configuration/Special functions/Heavy
Consumer control" menu. This can be accessed through the keyboard on GENSYS 2.0 Core, or with internet
explorer as show below:

Figure 44 - Heavy consumer validation
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

93

See diagrams below:
KW of Power Plant
KW available
Heavy Consumer authorization
100 KW
200 KW
Power Plant =2 GEs of 100 KW each
Heavy Consumer =75 KW
100 KW
Start and Synchronisation of second GE
time
time
time
Heavy Consumer demand
time

Figure 45 - Heavy Consumer Control with active power analysis
Nb Gensets on the busbar
Heavy Consumer authorization
Power Plant =3 GEs
Min Nb of GENSET =2
Start and Synchronisation of second GE
time
time
1
2
3
Heavy Consumer demand
time

Figure 46 - Heavy Consumer Control with number of gensets analysis

Configuration of the confirmation output (/Configuration/digital transistor output/):

Figure 47 - Configuration of the heavy consumer confirmation output
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

94

9.15 Non essential consumer trip (marine sequence)
9.15.1 Introduction
This function is used in Marine applications. Note that GENSYS 2.0 Core includes this function but does not
have type approval. Please contact your distributor if you need a Marine approved product.

If the generator reaches the overload or under frequency threshold (following timers), GENSYS 2.0 Core
triggers outputs to trip non essential loads. This chapter will describe how to use these features.

9.15.2 Procedure
To set the different thresholds and timers, go to the "Enhanced Configuration/Special functions Non essential
consumer trip" menu:


Figure 48 - Non essential consumer trip settings

Using different thresholds and timers, you can create a fast standard protection:

Note: The settings of timer 1 and timer 2 are the same for overload and under frequency protection. See
diagrams below:
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

95

KW1
KW2
t
timer 1
KW1
KW2
timer 2
t
E2729 is activated
E2729 is activated

Figure 49 - Non essential consumer trip alarm (1)

Min Hz 2
Min Hz 1 t
timer 1
Min Hz 2
Min Hz 1
timer 2
t
E2729 is activated
E2729 is activated

Figure 50 - Non essential consumer trip alarm (2)
Configuration of the trip output (/Configuration/digital transistor output/):

Figure 51 - Non essential consumer trip output setting
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

96


When the variable E2729 is activated, each trip output will activate after the same timer (E1894):


Figure 52 - Non essential consumer trip timers

If the variable E2729 becomes inactive, the outputs previously activated will keep the same status. If
variable E2729 becomes active again, the trip outputs continue as before.

E2729
1
0
E2728 " " " "
E2727
E2726 " " "
E2725
E2724

Figure 53 - Non essential consumer trip diagram

To deactivate the outputs, it is necessary to reset the alarm E2729 on the front panel.

9.16 Phase offset (Dyn11 and other)
Introduction
This special function, only available with option 8, provides a choice of phase offset [E1929] between
mains and Gen voltage measurement. That means that GENSYS 2.0 Core will command the breaker to close
with the selected phase angle shift. You must take care before choosing this function.



E1894 E1894 E1894 E1894 E1894

E2724:=1 E2724:=1 E2724:=1 E2724:=1 E2724 : =1


E2725:=1 E2725:=1 E2725:=1 E2725:=1



E2726:=1 E2726:=1 E2726:=1



E2727:=1 E2727:=1



E2728:=1




GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s

97

Example:

Figure 54 Phase offset example

Menu Settings
Phase offset [E1929]: This parameter can be chosen from the following values: 0, +30, +60, +90, +120,
+150, 180, -30, -60, -90, -120, -150

9.17 120 three phase and 180 two phase systems
Parameter E4039 allows you to select the system to be used in the Configuration/Basic
configuration/Genset menu.

System used E4039
Three phase 120 0 (default value)
Two phase 180 1





SYSTEM PARAM. CONNECTIONS
3 phase 120

3 phase +
Neutre
E
4
0
3
9

=

0


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

98

10 Text file & PLC
10.1 Introduction
The core system of the GENSYS 2.0 Core is based on a list of predefined variables.
These variables can be used in a proprietary programming language. This language uses simple keywords in an
ASCII text file. This text file is downloaded from GENSYS 2.0 Core (details in ). It is stored as a binary program
for use with flash memory. A copy of the source file is also stored on GENSYS 2.0 Core for documentation and
readability purposes. This copy can be retrieved at any time to be modified or transferred to another GENSYS
2.0 Core.
These equations can be used to add a logic equation and/or conditional function if your application requires
non standard functions. It is also possible to change the predefined behaviour with custom applications.
The PLC provided has a loop time of 100ms, and a special code can be defined to run the first time only (INIT).
This chapter provides all resources for PLC programming.
A text file can be transferred to or from the GENSYS 2.0 Core to set or retrieve the whole setup of the
GENSYS 2.0 Core.

The text file allows you to:
Set the value of every parameter.
Change the units of analogue inputs (example: V, mbar, PSI,).
Change the accuracy when displaying analogue values (example: 24V or 24.0V).
Change the labels of some custom inputs and the screensaver.
Transfer custom equations to the embedded PLC.

10.2 Variable naming
The file named A53 Z1 9 0030x.xls gives an explanation of each variable.
The variable number always uses the same format, the letter E followed by 4 digits:
EXYYY
The first digit, X, is the type of variable:
0 and 5: Measurement or real time value (Ex: Voltage phase 1, CAN Bus Fault )
1 and 4: Parameter to be stored in non-volatile memory (Ex: Genset number, Nominal power )
2 and 3: General purpose variable (Ex: Alarms, PLC variables )

The next 3 digits YYY give the number of the variable.
All the parameters (Variable from 1000 to 1999 and from 4000 to 4999) of the GENSYS 2.0 Core are stored
in a non-volatile FLASH memory within the module. It is possible to download or upload these parameters
with a computer, thus allowing the user to save, modify and reuse these parameters later.
All these values are stored in a text file. The following chapter describes the layout of the file.
The file can be exchanged between a PC and GENSYS 2.0 Core, as described in 1.6

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

99

10.3 Text file description
The text file is made up of 5 parts:
Parameter definitions
Label definitions
Unit definitions
Custom PLC Initialization definitions
Custom PLC Equation definitions

10.3.1 Parameter definition block
The starting point of this block is designated by a "{PARAMETERS}" statement.
Each parameter (1xxx or 4xxx variable) can be found as an input in this block. The structure of the input is as
follows:

The variable parameter number preceded by the letter V (Ex: V1006)
The value (Ex: 320)
R/W attribute (for MODBUS and PLC equations) (Ex: Y)
The label (only for clarification) (Ex: Gen Nominal KW)
The minimal value (only for clarification) (Ex: +00000)
The maximal value (only for clarification) (Ex: +65535)

Ex:
{PARAMETERS}
V1006 320 Y Gen nominal kW +00000 +65535
V1007 1.00 N Gen PT ratio +00000 +65535

In the example above, Genset nominal power is set to 320kW. The Y attribute shows that this value can be
changed by MODBUS or custom PLC equations (for de-rating purposes for example) whereas the N
attribute in the second line sets Generator PT ratio as "read only" for MODBUS and PLC equations.
It is possible to modify the values directly in the text file before uploading it into the GENSYS 2.0 Core. The
user must be sure that the modified value is within the minimum / maximum range. Failure to do so will
lead to an error message during uploading (Compilation result: VARIABLE).
It is also possible to write an incomplete parameter block (not all parameters are displayed in the list).
When uploaded, such a file will only modify the parameters which have been entered, the others remain
unchanged. This procedure can be used to upload an old text file into a newer GENSYS 2.0 Core or to
activate special features independently.





GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

100

10.3.2 Label definition block
The beginning of this block is shown by a "{LABELS}" statement.
This block is used to define custom labels.
Only the spare analogue inputs, the digital inputs, the virtual digital inputs, the maintenance cycle, and the
lines in the Logo Page can have an input in this block. The table below shows the correspondence between the
LABEL number and its associated value:

Analogue inputs Cycle label Virtual input
L0029 AI oil press.
L0030 AI water temp.
L0031 AI spare 1
L0032 AI spare 2
L1442 Cycle 1 (h)
L1443 Cycle 2 (h)
L1444 Cycle 3 (h)
L1445 Cycle 4 (h)
L1446 Cycle 5 (h)
L1447 Cycle 1 (d)
L1448 Cycle 2 (d)
L1449 Cycle 3 (d)
L1450 Cycle 4 (d)
L1451 Cycle 5 (d)

L2283 Virtual in 1
L2284 Virtual in 2
L2285 Virtual in 3
L2286 Virtual in 4
L2287 Virtual in 5
L2288 Virtual in 6
L2289 Virtual in 7
L2290 Virtual in 8
L2291 Virtual in 9
L2292 Virtual in 10
L2293 Virtual in 11
L2294 Virtual in 12
L2295 Virtual in 13
L2296 Virtual in 14
L2297 Virtual in 15
L2298 Virtual in 16
L2299 Virtual in 17
L2300 Virtual in 18
L2301 Virtual in 19
L2302 Virtual in 20

L2565 Virtual in 21
L2566 Virtual in 22
L2567 Virtual in 23
L2568 Virtual in 24
L2569 Virtual in 25
L2570 Virtual in 26
L2571 Virtual in 27
L2572 Virtual in 28
L2573 Virtual in 29
L2574 Virtual in 30
L2575 Virtual in 31
L2576 Virtual in 32
L2577 Virtual in 33
L2578 Virtual in 34
L2579 Virtual in 35
L2580 Virtual in 36
L2581 Virtual in 37
L2582 Virtual in 38
L2583 Virtual in 39
L2584 Virtual in 40

Spare input
L2657 User meter 1
L2659 User meter 2
L2804 Oil Pres/In J4
L2805 Wat.Temp/In J5
L2806 Spare Input J6
L2807 Spare Input J7
L2808 Spare Input J8
L2809 Spare Input J9
L2810 Spare InputJ10
L2811 Spare InputJ11
L2812 Spare InputJ12
L2813 Spare InputJ13
L2814 Spare InputJ14
L2815 Spare InputJ15
Table 27- Label definition bloc

Page logo label
T0249 GENSYS 2.0 Core
T0250 CRE product
T0251 Genset Paralleling
T0252 www.cretechnology.com
Table 28 - Custom logo labels

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

101

Each line of this block contains 2 elements:
The variable number of the text, preceded by the letter L for label, and T for page logo.
Ex: L1130
The text itself.

Labels are 14 characters long while Texts are 28 characters long maximum.
Ex: Sample Label
Supported characters include [a..z], [A..Z], [0..9] and the following graphical characters:
<space> ! # $ ( ) * + / : ; < = > [ ] ^ _ . -
All other characters are considered as insecure, and their use is prohibited. Their use can result in a bad
display.

Ex:
{LABELS}
L1130 Sample label
Note:
The label is language sensitive, i.e. a text file uploaded with PC language set to French will modify only the
French labels. The English or Italian labels will remain unchanged. For the same reason, a text file uploaded
with PC language set to French will display only French labels.
You must switch to the desired language before uploading/downloading a text file. Change the language
(menu System/ Back light timer / Languages/Local language) before changing the desired label.

10.3.3 Units and accuracy definition block
The beginning of this block is shown by a "{UNITS}" statement.
This block defines what kind of units and accuracy will be associated with each analogue value input
(GENSYS 2.0 analogue inputs, virtual inputs, and CANopen analogue inputs).
You only need to define the unit of the analogue input itself. All associated parameters (thresholds for
instance) will automatically be modified in accordance. This includes native analogue inputs, extension
CANopen analogue inputs, and virtual inputs.
The table below lists the different units supported by GENSYS 2.0 Core.
Only the 4 analogue inputs have an entry in this bloc (see file named Z090030.xls for variable number).
The structure of a unit/accuracy definition consists of the variable number preceded by a letter (U for Unit,
A for Accuracy definition) and followed by a code as shown in the examples below.

The input is as follows:
{UNITS}
U0029 01
U2584 00
A0029 0000032768

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

102

The tables below give you the list of codes which correspond to the supported units and accuracies. In the
examples above, input E2584 has no specific unit while input E0029 will be displayed in Volts (Unit code 01)
and with 2 decimal digits
(Accura
cy code
32768).











Table 29 - Valid units and accuracy codes

Code Unit Code Unit Code Unit Code Unit Code Unit
Electrical Power Pressure Volume Time
00 07 kW 13 Bar 20 L 24 s
01 V 08 kWh 14 mBar 21 m3 25 h
02 kV 09 kVAR 15 kPa 22 mm3 26 days
03 mA 10 kVARh 16 PSI 23 Gal Time related
04 A Rotating speed Temperature 27 Hz/s
05 kA 11 rpm 17 28 m3/h
Frequency Percent 18 C 29 L/h
06 Hz 12 % 19 F 30 Gal/h
Code Accuracy
00000 1
16384 0.1
32768 0.01
49152 0.001
Code Variable
number
Default
unit code
Default
accuracy
code
Description

Label
Native analogue inputs
0029 14 00000 Analogue measure of oil pressure (0- 400Ohm) AI oil press.
0030 18 00000 Analogue measure of water temp (0-400Ohm) AI water temp.
0031 00 00000 Analogue measure of analogue 1 (0-10kOhm) AI spare 1
0032 00 00000 Analogue measure of analogue 2 (0-10kOhm) AI spare 2
Analogue inputs for CANopen & CANopen extensions
0285 00 16384 analogue input 1 Analog in 01
0286 00 16384 analogue input 2 Analog in 02
0287 00 16384 analogue input 3 Analog in 03
0288 00 16384 analogue input 4 Analog in 04
0289 00 16384 analogue input 5 Analog in 05
0290 00 16384 analogue input 6 Analog in 06
0291 00 16384 analogue input 7 Analog in 07
0292 00 16384 analogue input 8 Analog in 08
0293 00 16384 analogue input 9 Analog in 09
0294 00 16384 analogue input 10 Analog in 10
0295 00 16384 analogue input 11 Analog in 11
0296 00 16384 analogue input 12 Analog in 12
0297 00 16384 analogue input 13 Analog in 13
0298 00 16384 analogue input 14 Analog in 14
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

103

0299 00 16384 analogue input 15 Analog in 15
0300 00 16384 analogue input 16 Analog in 16
0301 00 16384 analogue input 17 Analog in 17
0302 00 16384 analogue input 18 Analog in 18
0303 00 16384 analogue input 19 Analog in 19
0304 00 16384 analogue input 20 Analog in 20
0305 00 16384 analogue input 21 Analog in 21
0306 00 16384 analogue input 22 Analog in 22
0307 00 16384 analogue input 23 Analog in 23
0308 00 16384 analogue input 24 Analog in 24
0309 00 16384 analogue input 25 Analog in 25
0310 00 16384 analogue input 26 Analog in 26
0311 00 16384 analogue input 27 Analog in 27
0312 00 16384 analogue input 28 Analog in 28
0313 00 16384 analogue input 29 Analog in 29
0314 00 16384 analogue input 30 Analog in 30
0315 00 16384 analogue input 31 Analog in 31
0316 00 16384 analogue input 32 Analog in 32
0317 00 16384 analogue input 33 Analog in 33
0318 00 16384 analogue input 34 Analog in 34
0319 00 16384 analogue input 35 Analog in 35
0320 00 16384 analogue input 36 Analog in 36
0321 00 16384 analogue input 37 Analog in 37
0322 00 16384 analogue input 38 Analog in 38
0323 00 16384 analogue input 39 Analog in 39
0324 00 16384 analogue input 40 Analog in 40
0325 00 16384 analogue input 41 Analog in 41
0326 00 16384 analogue input 42 Analog in 42
0327 00 16384 analogue input 43 Analog in 43
0328 00 16384 analogue input 44 Analog in 44
Virtual inputs (first block)
2283 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 1 Virtual in 01
2284 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 2 Virtual in 02
2285 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 3 Virtual in 03
2286 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 4 Virtual in 04
2287 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 5 Virtual in 05
2288 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 6 Virtual in 06
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

104

Table 30 - Variables with customizable unit/accuracy values
2289 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 7 Virtual in 07
2290 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 8 Virtual in 08
2291 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 9 Virtual in 09
2292 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 10 Virtual in 10
2293 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 11 Virtual in 11
2294 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 12 Virtual in 12
2295 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 13 Virtual in 13
2296 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 14 Virtual in 14
2297 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 15 Virtual in 15
2298 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 16 Virtual in 16
2299 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 17 Virtual in 17
2300 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 18 Virtual in 18
2301 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 19 Virtual in 19
2302 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 20 Virtual in 20
Virtual inputs (second block)
2565 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 21 Virtual in 21
2566 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 22 Virtual in 22
2567 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 23 Virtual in 23
2568 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 24 Virtual in 24
2569 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 25 Virtual in 25
2570 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 26 Virtual in 26
2571 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 27 Virtual in 27
2572 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 28 Virtual in 28
2573 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 29 Virtual in 29
2574 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 30 Virtual in 30
2575 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 31 Virtual in 31
2576 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 32 Virtual in 32
2577 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 33 Virtual in 33
2578 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 34 Virtual in 34
2579 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 35 Virtual in 35
2580 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 36 Virtual in 36
2581 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 37 Virtual in 37
2582 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 38 Virtual in 38
2583 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 39 Virtual in 39
2584 00 00000 Virtual input Spare 40 Virtual in 40
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

105

10.3.4 Initialization definition blocks
The beginning of these blocks is shown by the statements "{INIT1}" or "{INIT2}" depending on the level of
access (1st or 2nd level password).
A user connected in level 0 (no password) cannot read equations from, or transfer equations to, the GENSYS
2.0 Core.
A user connected in level 2 will get access to INIT1 and INIT2 blocks.
A user connected in level 1 will only get access to the INIT1 block.
INIT equations are only run by the PLC when the power supply of the module is turned ON. They wont be run
again until power supply is turned OFF and then ON again. The purpose of these blocks is to provide custom
equations to the user. They are run during the power up stage.
INIT blocks are typically used to set the initialization values of outputs, timers or counters associated to
custom equations or custom parameters.
For further details on the programming language see chapter 10.4.

10.3.5 Equation definition blocks
The beginning of this these blocks is shown by the statements "{EQUATIONS L1}", "{EQUATIONS L2}",
depending on the level of access (1st level password or 2nd level password).
A user connected in level 0 (no password) cannot read equations from or transfer equations to the GENSYS
2.0.
A user connected in level 2 will get access to EQUATIONS L1 and EQUATIONS L2 blocks.
A user connected in level 1 will only get access to EQUATIONS L1 block.

The purpose of these blocks is to provide custom equations to the user which are run cyclically. These
equations are run every 100ms (PLC cycle time).
Non standard equations can be entered here to handle user defined features like thresholds, Input/Output
expansions, PID controls
For further details on the programming language see chapter 10.4.

10.3.6 End of file
Every text file must end with the "{END OF FILE}" statement.
GENSYS 2.0 Core will not try to read data following that statement, so you can place your own comments
here.

Note:
It is strongly recommended not to add too many comments after the" End of File" statement because the
size of the file must not exceed 126Kbytes.

NOTE:
This file is a text ONLY file. Do not use word processors (like Microsoft Word) to edit this file: it
would include layout information and corrupt the file. Use text editors only (Notepad for
example).
The file should not exceed 126Kbytes. If you try to transmit a bigger file to a GENSYS 2.0 Core, it
will be rejected.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

106


10.4 PLC programming language
It is strongly advised that you follow training before using custom PLC equations on a power plant. Contact
your local dealer for details on training sessions.
The PLC equations use a simple language with a small number of commands. The code is intrinsically linear,
each equation being executed one after the other (without any loop). Level 1 equations are executed first,
followed by level 2 equations. This way, level 2 equation results can overwrite any conflicting level 1 equation.
The "INIT" part is only executed upon start-up, and the "PROG" part is executed every 100 ms.
All the GENSYS 2.0 Core variables can be used in the equations in the way defined below:
-E0xxx and E5xxx are read only as measurements/inputs. They cant be changed by equations.
-E1xxx and E4xxx parameters can be read by equations. If allowed, they can also be modified using
MODBUS or equations downloaded via the text file (see {PARAMETERS} section of the text file chapter).
E2xxx parameters are PLC outputs. They can be read and written by custom equations.

Note:
-Variables E1xxx/E4xxx are parameters stored in FLASH (non volatile memory). In level 2 and above, the
user can allow the parameters to be written by PLC equations or via MODBUS.
-Be very careful when modifying a parameter through equations, as unexpected behaviour (due to an error
in your equations for example) may damage your generator.
-It is advisable to include tests in the equations to verify that the engine is stopped prior to changing a
parameter. Otherwise, make modifications in the "INIT" block if possible. These parameter modifications
will not be saved in FLASH memory, i.e. parameters will be reset to their previous value if power supply is
turned OFF and then ON again, unless the user saves them manually.
-Use document A53 Z1 9 0030x.xls to get a complete list of all GENSYS 2.0 Core variables.
-Variables E2xxx/E5xxx are outputs from the PLC, they can be read and written by PLC equations without
restrictions.

The table below gives a list of all available instructions that can be used in custom PLC equations:

Instruction family PLC instruction Definition
Program PROG
INIT
.
Starting point of PLC equations
Starting point of INIT equations
End of equations
Blocs BLOC
BEND
Starting and ending points of a
block of equations
Logical operators AND
OR
XOR
Logical operation used on a whole
variable (i.e. these are not bit to bit
operators)
Unary operators ! Bit to bit complement
- Sign change
> Right shift

Warning:
Power control and protections are disabled while the GENSYS 2.0 Core is processing a file. When
you download or upload a file, you have to disconnect all connectors, except power supply. You
must be in manual mode, with engine stopped.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

107

< Left shift
$ Hexadecimal value
Arithmetical operators + Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
INC Increment
DEC Decrement
Bit operators ^ Rotation right
| Access one bit
# Bits mask
Affectation := Affectation
Comparison operators EQ Equal
NE Not Equal
GT Greater Than
LT Less Than
GE Greater or Equal
LE Less or Equal
Array [...] Array element
Tests TEST
THEN
ELIF
ELSE TEND

Comments @
Table 31 Available instructions

Instructions are separated by a semicolon (;) except before reserved words BEND, ELIF, ELSE and TEND.
INIT and PROG blocks are terminated by a dot (.).
Each instruction is terminated by a semicolon (;) except before reserved words (BEND, ELIF, ELSE, TEND).

10.5 Variables
10.5.1 Variable type and size
The PLC equations only use 16 bit signed integer values. This means that all variables and data should be
between -32768 and +32767. This is an important point to keep in mind when comparing values or doing
calculations. For example, 20000*10 will produce a calculation overflow. For the same reason, variables
displayed with decimal digits are treated in the equations as if the decimal point wasnt there. For example,
a power supply voltage of 24.5 V will be treated as 245 in the equations.
Be careful when entering values which have digits after the decimal point. If you have one digit after the
dot, you have to multiply the number by 10. If you have two digits, multiply by 100.
For instance, the battery voltage measure (variable E0041), is from 0.0 to 6553.5, so you have one digit
after the dot. If you want to compare the battery voltage to 25.0 volts, you have to write:
TEST E0041 GT 250 THEN...
To know the number of digits after the dot, look in the A53 Z1 9 0030x.xls file. In the 'Mini' / 'Maxi'
columns, the number of digits after dot appears.


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

108

10.5.2 Locked variables versus dynamic variables
The PLC works with two complete sets of variables.
The first set is a snapshot of the values before the execution of the equations
The second set of variables is the result of the different equations already executed. Before execution
of the very first equation, the second set is an exact copy of the first set of variables. It is then altered
by the results of the custom equations.
Access to these two sets of variables is differentiated by the way you refer to a variable:
Eyyyy means that you want to use the value of variable YYYY before any equation was executed.
Xyyyy means that you want the actual value of variable YYYY, which has been modified by previous
equations.

When the cycle controller, checks the validity GENSYS 2.0 Core (range min / max) values of variables X2nnn. If
the value is legal, it is kept in memory for further operation. If the value is invalid, the internal variable will
retain the value it had just before the PLC cycle ( the value E2nnn).

Note that as the first set is a picture of the variables before execution of the equations, it can be viewed as
read only. This means that when you write the following equation:
E2680 := 320;
The value 320 will be attributed to variable 2680 in the second set of variables as well.

10.6 Syntax examples
Test examples:
TEST condition THEN instruction TEND;

TEST condition THEN BLOC instruction; instruction;;instruction BEND TEND;

TEST condition THEN BLOC instruction; instruction;;instruction BEND
ELIF condition THEN BLOC instruction; instruction;;instruction BEND
ELIF condition THEN BLOC instruction; instruction;;instruction BEND
ELSE BLOC instruction; instruction;;instruction BEND
TEND;
Calculation / instruction examples:
E2680:=(E2000+E2001+E2002+E2003)/4;
E2000:=2; E2680[E2000+1]:=10;
E2680:=(E0030 GT 1450) AND ((E0030 GT 1500) OR E2680);
Condition examples:
TEST E2050 EQ 1 THEN ...
TEST E0030 GT 1500 THEN ...
TEST (!E2046) AND E2055 AND ((E2071 EQ 14) OR (E2071 EQ 15)) EQ 1 THEN
The following example is a small text file that could be sent to a GENSYS 2.0 Core using a level 2 passwords.
In this example, the following variables are used:
E0160 is the value of CANopen digital input 1 from an extension module.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

109

E1710 is a user parameter. It will be used as the period of a counter.
E1711 is another user parameter used as the duty ratio of the counter.
E2440 is a user variable used as a counter in this example.
E2441 and E2442 are two user variables.


{INIT L2}
INIT 2
BLOC
E2440 := E1710;
E2441 := 0;
E2442 := 1
BEND
.

{EQUATIONS L2(every 100ms)}
PROG 2
BLOC
@ E2440 is used as a counter that decreases from parameter E1710 down to 0;
TEST E2440 GT 0 THEN
DEC E2440
ELSE
E2440 := E1710
TEND;
@ Set the values of E2441 and E2442 depending on digital input 1 (E0160) and the
counter E2440;
TEST E0160 AND (E2440 LT E1711) EQ 1 THEN
BLOC
E2441 := 1;
E2442 := 0
BEND
ELSE
BLOC
E2441 := 0;
E2442 := 1
BEND
TEND
BEND
.
{END OF FILE}

The INIT block initializes counter E2440 to the value set by the user in parameter E1710. Variable E2441 is
set to zero, and variable E2442 is set to one. These initializations are done when the GENSYS 2.0 Core
powers up.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

110

The PROG block is executed once every 100ms. In this block, if variable E2440 is not zero, it is decreased by
one. Otherwise, it is re-set to the value of parameter E1710. Then we check if CANopen digital input 1 is set to
one and counter E2440 is lower than the value set in user parameter E1711. If this is the case, E2441 is set to
one and E2442 is set to zero. Otherwise, E2441 is set to zero and E2442 is set to one.
For example if E1710 is set to 100 and E1711 is set to 20, E2441 can be seen as a PWM with a cycle time of 10s
(100*100ms) and a duty ratio of 20% when CANopen digital input is set to one. Here, E2442 is simply the
complement of E2441.

10.7 GENSYS 1.0 GENSYS 2.0 Core compatibility
Using a GENSYS 1.0 configuration file in a GENSYS 2.0 Core unit is a risky operation and requires excellent
knowledge of the parameters and equations transferred.
New functions have been added to the GENSYS 2.0 Core which use new variables. Certain GENSYS 1.0
variables have been redefined with new functions in the GENSYS 2.0 Core.

The digital input variables have been moved:
E2004 becomes E2804
E2005 becomes E2805
...
E2015 becomes E2815

The references for GENSYS 1.0 variables E2004 to E2015 must be replaced with variables E2804 to E2815 in
all the equations which will be introduced to the GENSYS 2.0 Core.
A timer may now be associated to these variables by using variables E1998, E1999 and E1277 to E1286.

Special care must be taken with the following parameters if used in the GENSYS 2.0 Core. Also check the
read/write authorisation (Y/N) which is associated with each parameter:
V1013 0 N J1939 sc adres +00000 +65535
V1017 60 N J1939err delay +00000 +65535
V1149 5.0 N Fail to O/C br +0000.0 +6553.5
V1476 0 N Div D ILS +00000 +65535
V1504 0 N Div D Q share +00000 +65535
V1517 1 N RESET delay +00000 +65535
V1596 125 N CAN Speed +00000 +65535
V1633 60 N Fail to start +00000 +65535
V1852 29 y Branch P-oil +00000 +65535
V1853 30 Y Brnch T-water +00000 +65535
V1854 33 Y Branch Speed +00000 +65535
V1855 0 Y Com2 protocol +00000 +65535
V1856 17 Y J1939 Address +00000 +65535
V1857 0 Y CT speed + +00000 +65535
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
e
x
t

f
i
l
e

&

P
L
C

111

V1858 0 Y CT Oil Pres - +00000 +65535
V1859 0 Y CT Cool Temp + +00000 +65535
V1860 0 Y CT Oil Pres -- +00000 +65535
V1861 0 Y CT Cool Temp++ +00000 +65535
V1862 0 Y CT speed ++ +00000 +65535
V1863 0 Y CT Malfonction +00000 +65535
V1864 0 Y CT Protection +00000 +65535
V1865 0 Y CT Orange +00000 +65535
V1866 0 Y CT Red +00000 +65535
V1867 0 Y Opt4Param12 +00000 +65535
V1868 0 Y Opt4Param13 +00000 +65535
V1869 0 Y Opt4Param14 +00000 +65535
V1870 0 Y Opt4Param15 +00000 +65535
V1871 0 Y Opt4Param16 +00000 +65535
V1916 0 Y Fuel relay fct +00000 +65535
V1925 60 N CANopenErDelay +00000 +65535
V1928 3 N CT Fail synch +00000 +65535
V1929 0 N Phase offset -32768 +32767

The parameters listed above are shown with their default settings for the GENSYS 2.0 Core. If your
configuration file or variables modify these parameters, make sure their use is the same as in the GENSYS
2.0 Core.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

112

11 Communication
11.1 CAN bus good practices
This chapter explains and describes good practices used to ensure a good reliable CAN communication. This
advice is true for all CAN bus connections and should be applied to both GENSYS 2.0 Core units for inter
GENSYS 2.0 Core bus, and for second CAN communication port (COM1 and COM2).


Figure 55 CAN bus wiring

Here is the standard pin out of a DB9 CAN connector compared with a GENSYS 2.0 Core implementation:

GENSYS 2.0 Core Standard
SHIELD GROUND
PIN 1 NC Cable Drain
PIN 2 CAN-L CAN-L
PIN 3 GROUND-1 CAN GND
PIN 4 NC free
PIN 5 GROUND-2 +24V POWER
PIN 6 GROUND-1 free
PIN 7 CAN-H CAN-H
PIN 8 NC free
PIN 9 NC 0V POWER
Table 32 DB9 pin out

Note: GROUND-1 and GROUND-2 are each protected with a 47 ohm resistor.

CAN bus cable:
The CAN bus cable must be able to carry the CAN signals (CAN-L and CAN-H). These 2 signal wires should be
a 120 Ohm twisted pair (Ex: Belden's 3105A, 3082A-3087A (www.belden.com), LAPP CABLE Unitronic bus
DeviceNet or CAN (www.lappcable.com) or equivalent).
The CAN bus-BUS cable must be shielded, and must have a drain wire connected to the cable shield. This
drain connects to pin 1 of each connector. The connector housing must be connected to the cable shield,
and metallic shells should be used if possible.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

113

For better results, a common GROUND should be used for all connected devices (this can be verified easily
with an ohmmeter, for example).
The total length of the cable must not exceed 250m for a CAN communication speed of 250kb/s. This length
may decrease with lower quality cables.
The CAN bus must be linear (no star connections) and both ends of the bus must be connected to 120 Ohm
termination resistors. GENSYS 2.0 Core includes 120 Ohm termination resistors on COM1 and COM2. These
termination resistors can be connected to the CAN bus via DIP switches at the rear of the module. Only the
GENSYS 2.0 Core located at an end of a CAN bus should have its termination resistor activated.

Maximal length of a CAN bus:
The maximal length of a CAN bus mostly depends on the communication speed, but also on the quality of
wires and connectors used. As said above, 120 Ohm termination resistors should also be used
appropriately.
Table below indicates the maximal length of a CAN bus depending on the communication speed.

Communication
speed (kbits/s)
Maximal length
(metres)
10 5000
20 2500
50 1000
125 500
250 250
500 100
800 50
1000 25

Communication speed of GENSYS 2.0 Core CAN bus:
COM1: 125kbps communication speed.
COM2:
o 125kbps communication speed for CANopen (factory setting). Maximal length: 500m. Can
be changed from 10 to 1000kbps in menu Configuration/Enhanced
configuration/CANopen.
o 250kbps for J1939+CANopen communication.
o 125kbps for MTU MDEC communication.


11.2 COM1: Inter GENSYS 2.0 Core CAN bus
This CAN bus is a communication bus between different GENSYS 2.0 Core /MASTER 2.0 units of the same
power plant. It allows GENSYS 2.0 Core units to synchronize with each other, manage dead bus
connections, share active and reactive load, send data from one module to the other and other features.
This CAN bus uses a CRE technology proprietary protocol.

Warning:
Never plug or unplug CAN bus connector when power is on. This may cause internal damage.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

114


The figure below shows the connections between each GENSYS 2.0 Core unit. The termination resistors are
integrated inside GENSYS 2.0 Core and can be activated with a switch located at the rear of the module (under
the plug marked OFF / 120). COM port is marked on the rear. You need to extract the plug to change the
switch. The termination resistor is connected to the CAN bus when the switch is pushed toward the 120
Ohm side. When the switch is towards ON, resistor is active on bus. When switch is pushed to the other side,
the resistor is not active on the bus.


Figure 56 - CAN Bus wiring

Terminals 2 and 7: 1 twisted pair cable.
Terminals 3 and 5: 1 twisted pair cable.
R: 120 Ohms termination resistor (included inside GENSYS 2.0 Core)

You can also use CRE technology accessories as shown below in figures 64 and 65 to connect several
GENSYS 2.0 units together. Contact your local distributor to help you choose accessories that fit your
needs.

Figure 57 - GENSYS 2.0 Core GENSYS 2.0 Core

Note: The 120 termination resistors must be activated using the micro switch on the rear of the units.
2
3
4
5
7
9
2
3
4
5
7
9
2
3
4
5
7
9

R
GENSYS
222.02.02.0
A
GENSYS
2.0 B
GENSYS
2.0 C

R
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

115


Figure 58 - GENSYS 2.0 Core GENSYS 2.0 Core GENSYS 2.0 Core

Note: The 120 termination resistors must be activated using the micro switch on the rear of the units.

The next figure shows the wiring for rental generators.

Figure 59 - Mobile generator sets

Note:
Each GENSYS 2.0 Core is connected with its genset with 2x A40W6 and 1xA40W3.
The 120 termination resistors must be activated using the micro switch on the rear of the units.

11.2.1 CAN bus fault
CAN bus communication is monitored by GENSYS 2.0 Core modules and compared to the GENSYS 2.0 Core
parameters. GENSYS 2.0 Core continuously transmits data on the COM1 CAN bus so each GENSYS 2.0 Core
can always know how many GENSYS 2.0 Core units are connected to the CAN bus and are switched on. The
number of GENSYS 2.0 Core units should always be equal to the number of generators configured on the
power plant settings of the GENSYS 2.0 Core (parameter E1147).
In case of discrepancy between parameter E1147 and the number of GENSYS 2.0 Core units seen on the
CAN bus, a CAN bus error is shown. This can also be the case if:
Two or more GENSYS 2.0 Core units share the same generator number (parameter E1179).
Termination resistors are not used correctly.
CAN bus cable is not properly connected

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

116

This CAN error can only be RESET when the correct number of GENSYS 2.0 Core modules can be seen on the
CAN bus.
As with every error managed by GENSYS 2.0 Core, the consequence of this error can be set up with parameter
E1259.

E1259 = 0: no action
E1259 = 1: generator electrical fault
E1259 = 2: mains electrical fault
E1259 = 3: alarm
E1259 = 4: soft shut down
E1259 = 5: hard shut down
E1259 = 6: droop mode; generate an alarm (default setting)
This fault only affects the working of a power plant with several GENSYS 2.0 Core units (E1147 > 1).

If a remote start occurs on a GENSYS 2.0 Core set up to manage Deadbus situations (E1515 = 0) and a CAN
bus fault has already been triggered, GENSYS 2.0 Core will start its engine and close its breaker (if there is
no voltage on the bus bar) after a delay that depends on the generator number (E1179). If there is a
voltage on the bus bar, GENSYS 2.0 Core will synchronize the generator before connecting to the bus bar.

In Auto mode, if there is a remote start and a CAN bus fault, the GENSYS 2.0 Core starts and closes its
breaker after a delay that depends on the generator number (E1179), but only if the dead Bus
management is on (E1515 = 0) and there is no voltage on the bus bar.
Otherwise it will try to synchronize with the bus bar.

If the generator is paralleled to the Mains when a CAN bus fault occurs, and error control variable E1259 is
set to 6 (Droop mode + Alarm), speed control will be switched to droop and volt control will be switched to
power factor regulation. If the mains are not connected, both speed and voltage droop is applied. With
generators paralleled and the bus CAN fault control variable (E1259) set to 6, the generators with
GENSYS 2.0 Core are in speed droop and power factor regulation when paralleled with the mains. When
not paralleled with mains they are in speed and voltage droop regulation.

Note:
If you need to disconnect a GENSYS 2.0 Core from the inter GENSYS 2.0 CAN bus, you must change the
number of generators (parameter E1147) on all other GENSYS 2.0 Core units of the power plant.

When the power plant is set to load/unload mode (Parameter E1258 set to "Hours run" or "Digital in"), all
generators will start using droop mode if a CAN bus error occurs.


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

117

11.2.2 Broadcasting data between multiple GENSYS 2.0 Core units
It is possible to send up to 10 digital variables and 2 analogue variables from one GENSYS 2.0 Core unit to all
other GENSYS 2.0 Core units connected to the same inter GENSYS 2.0 CAN bus (COM 1).
It is necessary to use a PC to create Broadcast Data by Inter GENSYS 2.0 CAN bus equations. Variables sent to
other GENSYS 2.0 Core units are described in the table below:

NOTE: When you assign a variable to broadcast data (ex: E2752:=...) remove the E from in front of the
variable name: this is the number of the variable you assign, not the variable itself.

Example to send digital input or analogue input to each GENSYS 2.0 Core:
2752:=2002
BEND
Variables which are sent via "Broadcast Data by Inter GENSYS 2.0 CAN bus":

Variable number Description
E2752 1
st
digital variable sent over CAN bus COM1VarDigCAN01
E2753 2
nd
digital variable sent over CAN bus COM1VarDigCAN02
E2754 3
rd
digital variable sent over CAN bus COM1VarDigCAN03
E2755 4
th
digital variable sent over CAN bus COM1VarDigCAN04
E2756 5
th
digital variable sent over CAN bus COM1VarDigCAN05
E2757 6
th
digital variable sent over CAN bus COM1VarDigCAN06
E2758 7
th
digital variable sent over CAN bus COM1VarDigCAN07
E2759 8
th
digital variable sent over CAN bus COM1VarDigCAN08
E2760 9
th
digital variable sent over CAN bus COM1VarDigCAN09
E2761 10
th
digital variable sent over CAN bus COM1VarDigCAN10
E2762 1
st
analogue variable sent over CAN bus COM1VarAnaCAN01
E2763 2
nd
analogue variable sent over CAN bus COM1VarAnaCAN02
Table 33 - Broadcast variables sent over inter GENSYS 2.0 CAN bus

You can select what should be sent on the CAN bus by using custom PLC equations. These equations
contain the number of the variable/parameter to be sent:
E27xx:= YYYY;
With E27xx being one of the broadcast variables and YYYY being the number of the variable you want to
send to the other GENSYS 2.0 Core.
In the equation below, the broadcast variable E2752 is used to send the value of variable E2002 to all the
other GENSYS 2.0 Core units connected on CAN bus COM1:
E2752:=2002;





GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

118

Broadcast variables received from other GENSYS 2.0 Family are listed in the table below:

Variable
number
Description
E0536 to E0545 1st to 10th Can bus extension digital input variables received from 1 to 10 GE01
E0546 to E0547 1st and 2nd Can bus extension analogue variables received from GE01input 1 to 2 GE1
E0552 to E0561 1st to 10th digital variables received from GE02Can bus extension digital inputs 1 to 10 GE2
E0562 to E0563 1st and 2nd analogue variables received from GE02Can bus extension analogue inputs 1 to 2 GE2
E0568 to E0577 1st to 10th digital variables received from GE03Can bus extension digital inputs 1 to 10 GE3
E0578 to E0579 1st and 2nd analogue variables received from GE03Can bus extension analogue inputs 1 to 2 GE3
E0584 to E0593 1st to 10th digital variables received from GE04Can bus extension digital inputs 1 to 10 GE4
E0594 to E0595 1st and 2nd analogue variables received from GE04Can bus extension analogue inputs 1 to 2 GE4
E0600 to E0609 1st to 10th digital variables received from GE05Can bus extension digital inputs 1 to 10 GE5
E0610 to E0610 1st and 2nd analogue variables received from GE05Can bus extension analogue inputs 1 to 2 GE5
E0616 to E0625 1st to 10th digital variables received from GE06Can bus extension digital inputs 1 to 10 GE6
E0626 to E0627 1st and 2nd analogue variables received from GE06Can bus extension analogue inputs 1 to 2 GE6
E0632 to E0641 1st to 10th digital variables received from GE07Can bus extension digital inputs 1 to 10 GE7
E0642 to E0643 1st and 2nd analogue variables received from GE07Can bus extension analogue inputs 1 to 2 GE7
E0648 to E0657 1st to 10th digital variables received from GE08Can bus extension digital inputs 1 to 10 GE8
E0658 to E0659 1st and 2nd analogue variables received from GE08Can bus extension analogue inputs 1 to 2 GE8
E0664 to E0673 1st to 10th digital variables received from GE09Can bus extension digital inputs 1 to 10 GE9
E0674 to E0675 1st and 2nd analogue variables received from GE09Can bus extension analogue inputs 1 to 2 GE9
E0680 to E0689 1st to 10th digital variables received from GE10Can bus extension digital inputs 1 to 10 GE10
E0690 to E0691 1st and 2nd analogue variables received from GE10Can bus extension analogue inputs 1 to 2 GE10
E0696 to E0705 1st to 10th digital variables received from GE11Can bus extension digital inputs 1 to 10 GE11
E0706 to E0707 1st and 2nd analogue variables received from GE11Can bus extension analogue inputs 1 to 2 GE11
E0712 to E0721 1st to 10th digital variables received from GE12Can bus extension digital inputs 1 to 10 GE12
E0722 to E0723 1st and 2nd analogue variables received from GE12Can bus extension analogue inputs 1 to 2 GE12
E0728 to E0737 1st to 10th digital variables received from GE13Can bus extension digital inputs 1 to 10 GE13
E0738 to E0739 1st and 2nd analogue variables received from GE13Can bus extension analogue inputs 1 to 2 GE13
E0744 to E0753 1st to 10th digital variables received from GE14Can bus extension digital inputs 1 to 10 GE14
E0754 to E0755 1st and 2nd analogue variables received from GE14Can bus extension analogue inputs 1 to 2 GE14
Table 34 Broadcast variables received by BROADCAST DATA from inter GENSYS 2.0 Family CAN bus

1/ Example 1: broadcast analogue and digital data
In this example, two GENSYS 2.0 Core units are connected together using CAN bus COM1. In this
configuration there will be one GENSYS 2.0 Core (GENSYS 2.0 Core #1) which sends variables and the other
GENSYS 2.0 Core (GENSYS 2.0 Core #2) which receive variables. Both of them will send two broadcast
variables on CAN bus COM1, one being digital input J6, the other one being analogue value E0033 (engine
speed).
Each of the two values will be usable by both GENSYS units. One will be a digital value (input J6) and the
other will be an analogue value.


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

119


Figure 60 - Connecting J6 to broadcast variables


Figure 61 - Connecting Magnetic pick up for speed broadcast

To send value from GENSYS 2.0 Core #1 to GENSYS 2.0 Core #2, write this equation:
BLOC
@Example to send digital and/or analogue oil pressure and speed input variables to the other GENSYS 2.0
Core;
E2752:=2006;
E2762:=33
BEND
GENSYS 2.0 Core
N 1
GENSYS 2.0 Core
N 2

To other GENSYS 2.0 Core Slave
inter GENSYS 2.0
CAN bus
G7-8
Magnetic pick-up (E0033)
G7-8
J6
Magnetic pick-up (E0033)
E0033 E2762
E0546
E0033 E2762
E0562
GENSYS 2.0 Core
N 1
GENSYS 2.0 Core
N 2

To other GENSYS 2.0 Core Slave
inter GENSYS 2.0
CAN bus
J6
Input J6 (E2006)
J6
Input J6 (E2006)
E2006 E2752
E0536
E2006 E2752
E0552
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

120

Digital input J6 from GENSYS 2.0 Core number 1 is sent on the CAN bus using the 1
st
digital broadcast variable
E2752, so it will be stored on variable E0536 of GENSYS 2.0 Core number 2.
Engine speed E0033 from GENSYS 2.0 Core number 1 is sent on the CAN bus using the 1
st
analogue broadcast
variable E2762, so it will be stored on variable E0546 of GENSYS 2.0 Core number 2. On GENSYS 2.0 #2, these
values can be read if the following variables are used:

E0536 which is the value of the GENSYS 2.0 Core #1 J6 input (E2806).
E0546 which is the value of the GENSYS 2.0 Core #1 engine speed input.

The same equations should be written on GENSYS 2.0 Core number 2:

BLOC
@ Example to send digital and / or analogue oil pressure and speed variables to other GENSYS 2.0 Core
units;
E2752:=2006;
E2762:=33
BEND
Digital input J6 from GENSYS 2.0 Core number 2 is sent on the CAN bus using the 1
st
digital broadcast
variable E2752, so it will be stored on variable E0552 of GENSYS 2.0 number 1.
Engine speed E0033 from GENSYS 2.0 Core number 2 is sent on the CAN bus using the 1
st
analogue
broadcast variable E2762, so it will be stored on variable E0562 of GENSYS 2.0 number 1.
On GENSYS 2.0 Core #1, these values can be read if the following variables are used:
E0552 which is the value of the GENSYS 2.0 Core #2 J6 input (E2806).
E0562 which is the value of the GENSYS 2.0 Core #2 engine speed input (E0033).

2/ Example 2: application example
In this example, which uses 3 GENSYS 2.0 Core units, a remote start signal connected to the J2 digital input
(E2002) of one GENSYS 2.0 Core is broadcast to the other GENSYS 2.0 Core units of the power plant. Thus,
only one remote start signal is needed.

Equation written on GENSYS 2.0 Core #1:

@Remote start input is only connected to GENSYS 2.0 Core #1 and is sent to the other units via CAN bus
(COM1);example to send digital input to the other GENSYS 2.0 Core units;
X2752:=2002
BEND
Equation written in all other GENSYS 2.0 Core units of the power plant:

@example to receive remote start digital input from GENSYS 2.0 Core #1;
X2514:=E0536
BEND
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

121

The broadcast data is received in variable E0536 on all other GENSYS 2.0 Core units and then copied to
variable E2514 (equation above).
Important: Even if CAN bus inhibition is activated between GENSYS 2.0 Core units (see below), broadcast data
is always sent and received on the inter GENSYS 2.0 CAN bus (COM1).

11.2.3 CAN bus inhibition
COM1 CAN bus is mainly used by GENSYS 2.0 Core modules to send power management data to each other.
CAN bus inhibition is used to prevent one GENSYS 2.0 Core from taking into account data coming from one or
more GENSYS 2.0 Core units. This is especially useful when tie breakers are used to change the configuration
of the power plant (for example from a 6 generator power plant to two power plants with 3 generators each).
Variables E2691 to E2704 are used to decide with which modules the GENSYS 2.0 Core should communicate
power management data.

Variable Description
E2691 Ignore power management data from GE01
E2692 Ignore power management data from GE02
E2693 Ignore power management data from GE03
E2694 Ignore power management data from GE04
E2695 Ignore power management data from GE05
E2696 Ignore power management data from GE06
E2697 Ignore power management data from GE07
E2698 Ignore power management data from GE08
E2699 Ignore power management data from GE09
E2700 Ignore power management data from GE10
E2701 Ignore power management data from GE11
E2702 Ignore power management data from GE12
E2703 Ignore power management data from GE13
E2704 Ignore power management data from GE14
Table 35 - CAN bus inhibition variables

If one of these variables is set to one, power management data from the corresponding GENSYS 2.0 Core
will not be taken into account.

Note that broadcast data is not influenced by the value of these inhibition variables, so it is still possible to
send and receive broadcast values between inhibited GENSYS 2.0 Core.

The example below shows a power plant made up of 4 generators that can be split into two power plants
of two generators each. GENSYS 2.0 Core units are connected together with a CAN bus on COM1. If it is
necessary to split a complete plant with a tie breaker, for example in a security application, it is necessary
to modify normal functioning:
In normal functioning, the tie breaker is closed, each GENSYS 2.0 Core communicates with the others by
CAN.
When the tie breaker is open, all GENSYS 2.0 Core units need to know that they have to consider the power
plant differently, with two separate bus bars.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

122


To allow this, we will use CAN bus inhibition.


Figure 62 - CAN bus inhibition schematic (example)

When the tie breaker is closed, all four GENSYS 2.0 Core units should communicate with each other for
power management, so variables E2691 to E2694 should be set to 0 (zero) on every GENSYS 2.0 Core unit
(no CAN inhibition).
When the tie breaker is open, generators DG1 and DG2 should communicate but ignore data from DG3 and
DG4. In the same way, generators DG3 and DG4 should communicate but ignore data from DG1 and DG2.
To do so, inhibition variables should be set as follows:

E2693 and E2694 set to 1 on generators DG1 and DG2.
E2691 and E2692 set to 1 on generators DG3 and DG4.

Feedback from the tie breaker can be connected to a GENSYS 2.0 Core digital input and then used in
custom PLC equations to set or reset these inhibition variables.

1/ How to set theses functions:
Special variables can be used to inhibit CAN bus variable use.

Each GENSYS 2.0 Core is able to ignore (inhibit) all the others, depending to the state of the inhibition can
variable.
Note that this does not affect BROADCAST DATA, but only genset related functions.
The following table describes these variables. To take effect (inhibition active), the variable must be set at
1.

Note: In the GENSYS 2.0 Core, control of inhibition is often associated with feedback from the Tie
breaker.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

123

Variable Genset inhibited
E2691 Inhibition variable for GE 1 on CAN bus
E2692 Inhibition variable for GE 2 on CAN bus
E2693 Inhibition variable for GE 3 on CAN bus
E2694 Inhibition variable for GE 4 on CAN bus
E2695 Inhibition variable for GE 5 on CAN bus
E2696 Inhibition variable for GE 6 on CAN bus
E2697 Inhibition variable for GE 7 on CAN bus
E2698 Inhibition variable for GE 8 on CAN bus
E2699 Inhibition variable for GE 9 on CAN bus
E2700 Inhibition variable for GE 10 on CAN bus
E2701 Inhibition variable for GE 11 on CAN bus
E2702 Inhibition variable for GE 12 on CAN bus
E2703 Inhibition variable for GE 13 on CAN bus
E2704 Inhibition variable for GE 14 on CAN bus
E2705 Inhibition variable for GE 15 on CAN bus
E2706 Inhibition variable for GE 16 on CAN bus
Table 36 - CAN bus inhibition parameters

11.3 COM2: CAN protocols (CANopen, J1939, MTU MDEC):
COM2 is a CAN bus communication port. It can be configured to communicate with external devices using
three different CAN protocols:
CANopen (factory setting): used to control remote I/O modules.
J1939+CANopen: used to control J1939 electronic engines and remote I/O modules.
MTU MDEC: MTU proprietary protocol to control MDEC electronic controller.

To select the protocol you want to use on COM2, go on page Enhanced configuration / J1939/MDEC.

11.3.1 COM2 set as CANopen
Industrial CANopen extension modules can be used to increase the number of digital/analogue inputs and
outputs of GENSYS 2.0 Core.

Figure 63 - Modular remote CANopen I/O extension module

The refresh rate of these CANopen inputs and outputs is 100ms.
Wiring of the CAN bus on COM2 should be as described in chapter 11.1 CAN bus good practices. Also refer
to the CANopen extension modules user manual for correct wiring on the CANopen module side.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

124


Modular remote I/O can also be added to GENSYS 2.0 Core using the CANOPEN protocol and DB9 connector.
For the remote I/O wiring see the figure below.

Figure 64 - CANopen coupler wiring

CAN L must be connected to pin 2 of the DB9.
CAN H must be connected to pin 7 of the DB9.
CAN GND must be connected to pin 5 of the DB9.
Drain must be connected to the shield of the DB9.

An end resistor of 120 must be connected to each end of the cable between CANH and CANL. This
resistor exists inside GENSYS 2.0 Core and can be activated with a switch accessible from the rear of the
unit and located under the plug marked OFF / 120. COM port is marked on the rear. You need to
extract the plug to change the switch. When the switch is ON, resistor is active on bus. When switched the
other way, the resistor is not connected to the bus.

Contact your local dealer for a list of recommended CANopen extension modules.

1/ System configuration
CANopen communication uses CANopen messages that can be set up in the Enhanced
configuration/CANopen menu. GENSYS 2.0 Core can handle a total of 13 input messages and 19 output
messages.
Three parameters must be set for each message to be used. Each message is determined by:
The ID of the CANopen extension module (most modules use DIP switches to set their ID).
The type of data contained in the message (analogue or digital).
The Number of input/output channels in the message.

Note: a CANopen message can handle a maximum of 4 analogue values or 64 digital values.

The total number of CANopen inputs/outputs available is:
44 analogue inputs.
128 digital inputs.
32 analogue outputs.
64 digital outputs.

To ensure proper communication between GENSYS 2.0 Core and CANopen extension modules, the
following rules should be followed:
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

125

For a given CANopen module, always group the maximum number of data of the same type in one message.
For example, it is better to set up one message with 50 digital inputs than 2 messages with 25 digital inputs
each.

Always group messages to/from one CANopen module. For example, do not use output messages 1 and 3 with
CANopen module number 1 and message 2 with CANopen module number 2. It is preferable to use messages
1 and 2 with module number 1 and message 3 with module number 2.

CANopen inputs and outputs can be accessed using GENSYS 2.0 variables as described below:

GENSYS 2.0 variable numbers Description
E0157 to E0284 CANopen digital inputs 1 to 128
E0285 to E0328 CANopen analogue inputs 1 to 44
E2368 to E2431 CANopen digital outputs 1 to 64
E2432 to E2439 CANopen analogue outputs 1 to 8
E2682 to E2689 CANopen analogue outputs 9 to 16
E2708 to E2723 CANopen analogue outputs 17 to 32
Table 37 - CANopen input and output variables

The lower variable number is associated to the lower message number configured. The following example
will help you understand the relationship between GENSYS 2.0 Core CANopen variables and physical
CANopen I/Os.

CANopen mapping example:
In this example, 3 CANopen modules are connected to CAN bus COM2 of GENSYS 2.0 Core. All these
modules offer different kinds of input.

CANopen
module
Physical I/Os available in the module
Configuration
Messages as set in GENSYS 2.0
CANopen inputs menu
Associated
Variable
number
ID coupleur
= 1
4 analog input 0-20mA
Msg 1:
ID = 1 ; type = Analog ;
nb of inputs = 4
E0285
E0286
E0287
E0288
2 analog inputs PT100
Msg 2:
ID = 1 ; type = Analog ;
nb of inputs = 2
E0289
E0290
2 analog inputs
Msg 3:
ID = 1 ; type = Digital ;
nb of inputs = 2
E0157
E0158
ID coupleur
= 2
2 thermocouple analog input
Msg 4:
ID = 2 ; type = Analog ;
nb of inputs = 2
E0291
E0292
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

126

CANopen
module
Physical I/Os available in the module
Configuration
Messages as set in GENSYS 2.0
CANopen inputs menu
Associated
Variable
number
4 digital inputs
Msg 5:
ID = 2 ; type = Digital ;
nb of inputs = 4
E0159
E0160
E0161
E0162
ID coupleur
= 3
10 thermocouple analog inputs
Msg 6:
ID = 3 ; type = Analog ;
nb of inputs = 4
E0293
E0294
E0295
E0296
Msg 7:
ID = 3 ; type = Analog ;
nb of inputs = 4
E0297
E0298
E0299
E0300
Msg 8:
ID = 3 ; type = Analog ;
nb of inputs = 2
E0301
E0302
Table 38 - CANopen configuration example

11.3.2 COM2 as MDEC (MTU) on COM2
The MDEC Engine Management System controls and monitors all the functions of MTU 2000 and 4000
Series genset engines. This system includes an Engine Control Unit (ECU), an Engine Monitoring Unit (EMU),
a Local Operating Panel (LOP) and engine wiring and sensors.
It incorporates a self-diagnosis system, complemented by a load profile recorder which stores the service-
life data of the engine in much the same way as a flight recorder.
MDEC also serves as the interface between the engine electronics and the overall generator including
gearbox, coupling and alternator.
Note: Selecting MTU MDEC communication prevents you from using CANopen remote I/O modules.

1/ MDEC configuration
To correctly communicate with GENSYS 2.0 Core, MDEC internal variables have to be configured. The
MDEC should be configured as follows to activate the CAN communication:

200 set to 450.
201.01 set to 32.
201.05 set to 201.

For more information on MDEC configuration contact your MTU dealer.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

127

2/ GENSYS 2.0 Core configuration
To activate the MTU CAN connection enter Enhanced configuration/J1939/MDEC menu, and select MTU
protocol.
Download the custom language. MDEC has labels and codes or numbers which correspond to the MDEC
variables:
Z090210_2_vxxx.txt corresponds to the English version.
Z090210_3_vxxx.txt corresponds to the French version.
Note: v2.05 is the corresponding software version of your GENSYS 2.0 Core.

3/ MDEC GENSYS 2.0 Core wiring




Label GENSYS 2.0
terminal
MDEC X1
connector
X003
connector
Digital output to stop request and
emergency stop
C1 h 25
g to ground 26 to ground
Digital output to start request C2 N 43
M 44 to ground
CAN High COM 2 pin 7 G 49
CAN Low COM 2 pin 2 F 50
CAN ground COM 2 pin 5 E 51
Analogue speed command G9 AA 8
Analogue speed reference G11 q 36
Table 39 - MDEC connection





X003
connector
h
g


N
M
MDEC
G
F
E
AA
q
C1



C2
GENSYS 2.0 Core


COM2 / 7
COM2 / 2
COM2 / 5
G9
G11
25
26


43
44

49
50
51
8
36
0V
0V
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

128

Useful GENSYS 2.0 Core parameters are listed below to ensure proper communication with the MDEC module:
Variable
number
Label Valu
e
Description
V1076 ESG amplitude 50.0 Speed output amplitude to have a trip frequency of +/-3Hz.
V1077 ESG offset 0.00 Offset to obtain nominal frequency.
V1156 Local language 3 Custom language selected for MDEC labels on the GENSYS
2.0 Core screen.
V1311 PC language 3 Custom language selected for MDEC labels on your PC.
V1710 User param 001 10 Time to stop request on digital output C1 (1.0 sec. here)
V1711 User param 002 1500 Nominal speed for MDEC through CAN bus.
V1712 User param 003 300 Delay (*100ms) before triggering an MTU CAN bus error. (30
seconds here).
V1852 Branch P-oil 352 The Analogue oil pressure that comes from the MTU CAN
bus will be used. (*)
V1853 Branch T-water 400 The Analogue water temperature that comes from the MTU
CAN bus will be used. (*)
V1854 Branch Speed 331 The Speed measure that comes from the MTU CAN bus will
be used. (*)
V1855 Opt4 protocol 1 To choose the MTU MDEC CAN bus protocol on COM2.
V1856 MTU
CANbusNode
6 Each device on the MTU CAN bus has a node number.
GENSYS 2.0 uses have the number 6.
V1857 MTUPV110003
CT
0 Protection control for over speed from MDEC (E0332). (**)
V1858 MTUPV110010
CT
3 Protection control for combined alarm yellow from MDEC
(E0339). (**)
V1859 MTUPV110014
CT
5 Protection control for combined alarm red from MDEC
(E0343). (**)
V1860 MTUPV110029
CT
0 Protection control for low oil pressure from MDEC (E0355).
(**)
V1861 MTUPV110030
CT
0 Protection control for very low oil pressure from MDEC
(E0356). (**)
V1862 MTUPV110047
CT
0 Protection control for low fuel pressure from MDEC (E0358).
(**)
V1863 MTUPV110048
CT
0 Protection control for very low fuel pressure from MDEC
(E0359). (**)
V1864 MTUPV110055
CT
0 Protection control for low coolant level from MDEC (E0363).
(**)
V1865 MTUPV110099
CT
0 Protection control for low coolant level, charge air, from
MDEC (E0386). (**)
V1866 MTUPV110129
CT
0 Protection control for high coolant temperature from MDEC
(E0403). (**)
V1867 MTUPV110130
CT
0 Protection control for very high coolant temperature from
MDEC (E0404). (**)
V1868 MTUPV110133
CT
0 Protection control for high charge air temperature from
MDEC (E0407). (**)
V1869 MTUPV110143
CT
0 Protection control for high oil temperature from MDEC
(E0414). (**)
V1870 MTUPV110168
CT
0 Protection control for low charge air temperature from
MDEC (E0422). (**)
V1871 MTUPV110177
CT
0 Protection control for low engine speed from MDEC
(E0426). (**)
Table 40 - Important parameters
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

129


(*) the standard sensors required for oil pressure, water temperature and engine speed dont need to be
connected to GENSYS 2.0 Core. The value of these 3 analogue inputs (E0029, E0030, E0033) will be
taken from the MTU CAN bus.
(**) control can take the following values:
0: disable.
1: Generator electrical fault.
2: Mains electrical fault.
3: Alarm.
4: Fault (soft shut down).
5: Security (hard shut down).

4/ MDEC variables:
The following variables are used to communicate with MTU MDEC devices:
E0330 to E0484 as input variables (MDEC to GENSYS 2.0 Core).
E2662 to E2677 as output variables (GENSYS 2.0 Core to MDEC).
The variables from MDEC can be seen from E0330 to E0484.
The variables than can be written in MDEC are available from E2662 to E2677.
The table in the annexes lists all the variables with correspondences between MDEC and GENSYS 2.0.



















GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

130

5/ Specific screens for MDEC dedicated pages:
Engine monitoring can be done via the Display/\Engine meters menu:

Figure 65 MDEC Screens

6/ Additional information
In the standard configuration GENSYS 2.0 Core can display all the MDEC variables available on the CAN bus
thanks to the screen seen above. These variables are displayed as is without any further processing,
except for certain faults. If you need additional functions related to these variables you will have to
program your own PLC equations.
It is also possible to monitor and manage MDEC variables remotely through MODBUS communication on
GENSYS 2.0 Core COM5.

7/ Alarms
The following example will show you how to handle predefined alarms (listed is an example of the
predefined alarm seen above):
E1857 is dedicated to over speed protection from MDEC (E0332). The equation is the following:
TEST (E0332 EQ 1) AND (E1857 NE 0) EQ 1 THEN E2199[E1857]:=1 TEND;
E0332 is the over speed alarm from MDEC.
E1857 is the control.
If you set E1857 as security (E1857=5) and E0332 is set to 1, then E2204 (hard shut down) will also be set to
1 and trigger the hard shutdown process.
Variables
from MDEC
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

131

If you want to use an MDEC alarm that is not handled directly by GENSYS 2.0 Core, you can use a virtual input
as described in the following example:
If an alarm from MDEC not managed with the standard program is required, you can use a virtual input.
For example, if you want to handle an MDEC alarm for SS Power Reduction Active (E0338), you can use the
virtual input 2 (E2284). In the Enhanced / Configuration\>>\Virtual input menu, set virtual input 2 with the
function (E1329). Choose External alarm, and load the following equation in a text file:
E2284:=E0338;
You can also change the label of the virtual input to be displayed on screen when the alarm occurs.


Figure 66 Virtual input screen

8/ Fault code numbers.
Combined yellow / red alarms are global warnings. They can be triggered by one of several faults provided
on the CAN bus (see list below). Apart from these predefined errors, additional alarm sources are available
and can be detected using MDEC fault code numbers.
The MDEC fault code is read by GENSYS 2.0 Core and stored in MDEC (GENSYS 2.0 Core variable E0372). If
several failures happen together, the fault code variable will be refreshed every second.
This will help you find which alarm is activated in case of a combined alarm.

11.3.3 J1939 Communication
J1939 is a common CAN protocol used on modern electronic ECUs. To use J1939 communication on COM2,
you must enter the Enhanced configuration /J1939/MDEC menu and select J1939 (2) protocol.

Then select the type of engine in the list (E4034).
1=Scania 5= Standard
2=Volvo 6= Custom
3=Perkins 7= Cummins
4=Iveco
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

132

Then GENSYS 2.0 Core will be set for your engine communication automatically.
The parameter E4034 allow you to delay the communication breakdown alarm J1939 ( E8051). If set to 0, no
J1939 alarm occur.

GENSYS 2.0 Core can communicate with most J1939 engines, even those not mentioned in this document. For
those engines please contact CRE technology or your local distributor.
Set the GENSYS 2.0 Core address by setting E1856 to 17(17 is the default setting) and setting the potential
faults.
Press SHIFT + I to save the configuration into the FLASH memory.
Connect the engine CAN bus to COM2 with an A40W2 cable or equivalent (see note below).
Switch the power supply OFF then ON again to reset the system.
Note:
connect:
-CAN Hi to terminal 2 of GENSYS 2.0 Core COM2 connector.
-CAN Lo to terminal 7 of GENSYS 2.0 Core COM2 connector.
-GND to terminal 5 of GENSYS 2.0 Core COM2 connector.

SHIELD must be connected to mechanical ground.
Communication speed is 250 Kbits, non modifiable.
1/ J1939 fault
Variable E2511 is used to detect a J1939 reception error. If E2511 equals 1, it means that no CAN frames
have been received from the ECU for more than 2 seconds. This error is not latched and resets to 0 (zero)
as soon as a new CAN frame is received.

2/ Engine Speed
Variable E0330 contains the engine speed value read from J1939 (in RPM, from 0 to 8031).
To use this J1939 speed value instead of the GENSYS 2.0 Core internal speed measurement, set E1854
variable to 330.
To use GENSYS 2.0 Core internal speed measurement set E1854 to 33 (default value).

3/ Coolant temperature
Variable E0333 contains coolant temperature value read from J1939 (in C, from -40 to +210).
To use this J1939 coolant temperature value instead of the GENSYS 2.0 Core internal measurement, set
variable E1853 to 333.
To use GENSYS 2.0 Core internal temperature measurement set E1853 to 30 (default value).

4/ Oil pressure
Variable E0331 contains oil pressure value read from J1939 (in Bars, from 0.00 to 10.00).
To use this J1939 oil pressure value instead of the GENSYS 2.0 Core internal measurement, set variable
E1852 to 331.
To use GENSYS 2.0 Core internal oil pressure measurement set E1852 to 29 (default value).
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

133

5/ Engine diagnostic status
The GENSYS 2.0 Core is able to monitor diagnostic messages (DM1) from the J1939 engine ECU. Only relevant
diagnostic messages are taken into account and used in the GENSYS 2.0 Core fault/alarm system. GENSYS 2.0
Core is able to understand and interpret messages for display, process, and protection.
RESET message (DM3) is sent to the engine when internal GENSYS 2.0 Core RESET is activated (RESET button
or internal variable).
If the diagnostic message is not sent by the J1939 ECU for more than 3 seconds, the corresponding fault/alarm
is automatically reset to OFF.

6/ J1939 messages
Each of the following J1939 messages/alarms can be configured to serve one of 8 internal GENSYS 2.0 Core
protections (see 8 for full explanations):

Value Behaviour
0 Disable
1 Generator electrical fault
2 Mains electrical fault
3 Alarm
4 Soft Shutdown
5 Hard Shutdown
7 Help + Fault (Soft shut down)
8 Help + Gen. Electrical fault
Table 41 - J1939 message actions (protections)
Red "lamp"
This message is used to relay trouble code information that is of a severe enough condition that it warrants
stopping the engine. Variable E0403 contains the "Red lamp" value read from J1939. 0 means Not
Activated. 1 means Activated.
To set the behaviour of the GENSYS 2.0 Core when receiving the "Red lamp" message from the engine,
variable E1866 must be set (hard Shutdown is the default value).

Amber "lamp"
This message is used to relay trouble code information that is reporting a problem with the engine system
where the engine need not be immediately stopped. Variable E0386 contains the "Amber lamp" value read
from J1939. 0 means Not Activated. 1 means Activated.
To set the behaviour of the GENSYS 2.0 Core when receiving the "Amber lamp" message from the engine,
variable E1865 must be set (disabled is the default value).
Protect "lamp"
This message is used to relay trouble code information that is reporting a problem with an engine system
that is most probably not electronic subsystem related. For instance, engine coolant temperature is
exceeding its prescribed temperature range. Variable E0363 contains the "Protect lamp" value read from
J1939. 0 means Not Activated. 1 means Activated.
To set the behaviour of the GENSYS 2.0 Core when receiving the "Protect lamp" message from the engine,
variable E1864 must be set (disabled is the default value).

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

134

Malfunction "lamp"
A message used to relay only emissions-related trouble code information. This message is only illuminated
when there is an emission-related trouble code active. Variable E0359 contains the "Malfunction lamp" value
read from J1939. 0 means Not Activated. 1 means Activated.
To set the behaviour of the GENSYS 2.0 Core when receiving the "Malfunction lamp" message from the
engine, variable E1863 must be set (disabled is the default value).

Very high engine speed
This message is used to relay that the engine speed is above the most severe high level threshold set for the
engine. Variable E0358 contains the Very high engine speed value read from J1939. 0 means Not Activated.
1 means Activated.
To set the behaviour of the GENSYS 2.0 Core when receiving the Very high engine speed" message from the
engine, variable E1862 must be set (hard Shutdown is the default value).

High engine speed
This message is used to relay that the engine speed is above the least severe high level threshold set for
the engine. Variable E0332 contains the "High engine speed" value read from J1939. 0 means Not
Activated. 1 means Activated.
To set the behaviour of the GENSYS 2.0 Core when receiving the "High engine speed" message from the
engine, variable E1857 must be set (disabled is the default value).

Very high coolant temperature
This message is used to relay that the coolant temperature is above the most severe high level threshold
set for the engine. Variable E0356 contains the "very high coolant temperature" value read from J1939. 0
means Not Activated. 1 means Activated.
To set the behaviour of the GENSYS 2.0 Core when receiving the "Very high coolant temperature" message
from the engine, variable E1861 must be set (soft Shutdown is the default value).

High coolant temperature
This message is used to relay that the coolant temperature is above the least severe high level threshold
set for the engine. Variable E0343 contains the "High coolant temperature" value read from J1939. 0
means Not Activated. 1 means Activated.
To set the behaviour of the GENSYS 2.0 Core when receiving the "High coolant temperature" message from
the engine, variable E1859 must be set (disabled is the default value).

Very low oil pressure
This message is used to relay that the oil pressure is below the most severe low level threshold set for the
engine. Variable E0355 contains the "Very low oil pressure" value read from J1939. 0 means Not Activated.
1 means Activated.
To set the behaviour of the GENSYS 2.0 Core when receiving the "Very low oil pressure" message from the
engine, variable E1860 must be set (Hard Shutdown is the default value).

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

135

Low oil pressure
This message is used to relay that the oil pressure is below the least severe low level threshold set for the
engine. Variable E0339 contains the "Low oil pressure" value read from J1939. 0 means Not Activated. 1
means Activated.
To set the behaviour of the GENSYS 2.0 Core when receiving the "Low oil pressure " message from the engine,
variable E1858 must be set (disabled is the default value).

Note: All the parameters are available through Web pages in the Enhanced configuration/System/J1939
menu.


7/ Custom Frames
Custom Rx Frames
If you need to get more values from the J1939 device than those available in the basic operations, the
system is able to read raw data from 5 different frames you can set to fit your needs.
The following variables are used to define those 5 custom Rx messages: E2675, E2676, E2677, E2678, and
E2679 define the ID of the frames to be monitored. The IDs are those defined by the J1939/71 standards.
The raw data is available as 8 bytes in variables E0410-E0417, E0420-E0427, E0430-E0437, E0440-E0447
and E0450-E0457.


Custom RX frame Frame ID variable Frame Raw data variables
1 E2675 E0410 to E0417
2 E2676 E0420 to E0427
3 E2677 E0430 to E0437
4 E2678 E0440 to E0447
5 E2679 E0450 to E0457

Please refer to J1939/71 standards to find the frame ID that fits your needs.
Note that there are no additional web pages to configure these custom RX frames. Please use custom PLC
equations to access custom RX variables. The variables are only accessible by equations.
Custom Tx Frame
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

136

If needed, a custom frame can be sent (every 25 or 50 ms) by the GENSYS 2.0 Core to the J1939 device.
Refresh time depends on E1917 parameter as follows:
0 is 50ms refresh time rate.
1 is 25ms refresh time rate.

The Variable E2662 defines the size of the frame (from 0 to 8 bytes). A value of -1 switches off custom TX
frame transmission.
The Variables E2663, E2664, E2665, E2666 define the ID of the frame to be send sent (E2663 being the least
significant byte; E2666 is the most significant byte).
The Variables E2667 to E2674 contain the raw data to be sent (E2667 contains data byte 1).
Note that there are no additional web pages to configure the custom TX frame. Please use custom PLC
equations to access custom TX variables.

8/ Specific engine notes
VOLVO EMS2
This electronic control unit has no other means of control than J1939 CAN bus.
Note: Do not use CIU module with GENSYS 2.0 Core.
120 ohms termination resistor is included on the rear panel of GENSYS 2.0 Core.
GENSYS EMS2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8 poles
connector
J1939 High
J1939 Low
Batt Switched
+V Batt
Emergency
Stop
A2
A3
7
2
120
1N4007

Figure 67 - Wiring diagram for Volvo EMS2


CUMMINS:
Most of Cummins J1939 engines enables display of three values:
Motor speed.
Oil pressure.
Temp ature of the water coolant.

On engines QSX15-G8, GENSYS 2.0 Core can control the speed via the bus J1939( if the ECU Cummins has
such a control frame). This is particularly the case of embedded software Cummins (N12013 Calibration ).
Contact your Cummins distributor or CRE Technology for more information on the engines which can be
driven by bus J1939.

IVECO:
Oil pressure value from Iveco engines is never sent by J1939 CAN bus. Additional sensor should be
connected to GENSYS 2.0 Core to get an analogue measurement used in association with an analogue input
program like VDO.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

137

The Fuel relay is used to supply power to the control unit.
A different Crank output sequence must be used because the crank signal command must be given after the
control unit is powered up. GENSYS 2.0 Core output supply: The C1 output1 sends the crank signal 2 seconds
after the normal Crank output.
The following signals can be recovered from the control unit:
Digital oil pressure.
Analogue oil pressure.
Digital water temperature.

11.4 COM3: USB
This communication port is no longer used in GENSYS 2.0 Core firmware as from version 2.0.
PC connection is now provided via the RJ45 Ethernet communication port.

11.5 COM4: ETHERNET
The Ethernet port allows two communication protocols:
HTTP for the visualization and configuration of GENSYS 2.0 Core PC.
Modbus TCP control GENSYS 2.0 Core SCADA.
To communicate through Modbus TCP, you need to set up the following data on GENSYS 2.0 Core:
Modbus slave identifier (E1634) which can be set up in menu System/Serial port configuration.
IP address of the GENSYS 2.0 Core which can be set up in menu System/Serial port configuration.
Use Ethernet communication port 502 on your PLC or computer software (standard Modbus TCP
port).
For more details on the Ethernet configuration, see Chapter: navigation remotely via a PC (Ethernet
connection).
For more details about the Modbus functions supported, see Chapter 5.13

11.6 COM5: MODBUS RTU on serial port RS485
All GENSYS 2.0 Core internal variables (Measurements, parameters, PLC outputs) can be monitored
remotely through an RS485 communication bus using a MODBUS RTU protocol, GENSYS 2.0 Core being a
MODBUS slave. It is also possible to enter parameters into the GENSYS 2.0 Core. All digital and analogue
input/output values and all other parameters which appear in the GENSYS 2.0 Core menus can be obtained
by the serial port RS485, DB9 male COM4. Parameters (E1nnn) are in read only mode (factory setting) but
can be individually switched to Read/Write mode using the embedded Web site. Measurements (E0nnn)
are Read only, variables E2nnn are in Read/Write mode.


As said above parameters E1nnn are set to READ ONLY. Write access can be done on a per parameter
basis using a configuration text file sent by PC to the GENSYS 2.0 Core. Please refer to chapter 10 for more
details on this Read/Write attribute.

Warning:
Be careful when modifying a parameter while the engine is running as unexpected behaviour
while functioning may damage your generator. It is always advised to change parameters when
generator is stopped.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

138


MODBUS supported functions are:
03 Read holding registers.
04 Read input registers.
06 Preset single register.
16 Preset multiple registers.

Note: MODBUS register addresses have an offset of +1 compared to variable numbers. This means that you
should use address 1 (one) in a MODBUS request to get the value of GENSYS 2.0 Core variable E0000.
MODBUS settings can be found in the System/Serial communication ports menu, where you can set:
MODBUS slave address E1634 (valid MODBUS slave address is in the range 1247).
Communication speed (4800, 9600, 19200 bauds).

Note: GENSYS 2.0 Core doesnt support broadcast requests (i.e. requests sent with ID address set to zero).

Other serial port parameters are:
8 data bits
No parity bit
1 stop bits
COM5 pin out is as follows:
Pin number Description
5 B signal
6 A signal
3, 4, 9 GROUND
1, 2, 7, 8 Not connected
Table 42 - COM5 pin out

Wiring on the serial port can be achieved using 2 wires (plus GROUND and SHIELD) in point to point mode
(1 master and 1 slave) or in multi-drop mode (1 master and several slaves).
The following figure shows the wiring between the GENSYS 2.0 Core and an RS485 modem.

Figure 68 - GENSYS 2.0 Core GENSYS 2.0 Core GENSYS 2.0 Core (MODBUS)
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

139

The RTU address of the variables is the same as their number plus 1, converted into hexadecimal. For example,
variable 2000 (Mains break in) has for RTU address 07D1h (2001). See the Z090030.xls file to locate the
variable number.

Supported functions:
04 Analogue reading
03 Register reading
16 Preset multiple registers

Example: Here are two MODBUS RTU frames (request from a remote device and answer from GENSYS 2.0). In
this case GENSYS 2.0 Core slave address is 5, and the request is to read variables E0000, E0001 and E0002. The
result is a function 04 request starting at address 1 (variable E000) and ending at address 3 (variable E0002).

MODBUS Request:
Fields Value (hex)
Slave address 05
Function 04
MSB start address 00
LSB start address 01
MSB number of registers 00
LSB number of registers 03
CRC16 --
GENSYS 2.0 Core answers Response:
Field Value (hex)
Slave address 05
Function 04
Number of bytes 06 (3 registers * 2 bytes per register)
1st byte (MSB of 1st reg.) xx
2nd byte (LSB of 1st reg.) xx
3rd byte (MSB of 2nd reg.) xx
4th byte (LSB of 2nd reg.)xx
5th byte (MSB of 3rd reg.) xx
6th byte (LSB of 3rd reg.) xx
CRC16 --

11.7 COM6: SD card
GENSYS 2.0 Core is equipped with a SD card slot. This is used to save GENSYS 2.0 Core information on a
regular basis using flash memory.

Memory cards must be FAT16 format and no larger than 2Go. High capacity SDHC cards and FAT32 format
are not compatible.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

140






Backup using SD Cards:
The SD card must contain a file named logger.csv. CSV (Comma separated value) is a computer file format
which shows tables in the form of values separated by commas or semi-colons.
This file can be created using Microsoft Excel or the notepad: open the notepad, then write the names of
the variables you wish to save (max 25) using the Exxxx format. Separate each variable with a comma and
save the file as logger.csv :


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

141



Variable E4041 allows you to choose the recording time in seconds. As soon as the SD card is inserted into the
GENSYS 2.0 Core, the recording will start every E4041 seconds.
Every E4041 seconds, all the variables entered in the first line of the logger.csv file will be saved to the file.
To avoid damaging information, only remove the SD card when the LED at the top right of the display (see
below) is turned off.

To view the archive, open the logger.csv file using Excel. Each line of recording is date marked.



Select the first column (A) with saved values.
Click on "Data", then "convert".
Select "limited".
Select Table, Comma and Semicolon. Click "Next".

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

142



The variables, values, dates and times are now laid out in columns.


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g

143

12 Troubleshooting

GENSYS 2.0 Core displays a "sensor lost" fault at the time of start:
Check voltage AC on terminal (B1 to B4).
Check the speed increases until 1500 RPM

If you dont have these values and engine stops:
Increase the "sensor lost" timer (default value 4 sec.)
You can increase this timer with variable E1458 in Configuration/Speed control setting.

During starting, GENSYS 2.0 Core displays oil pressure fault or not ready:
If you are in manual mode, you must push and hold start or GENSYS 2.0 Core will display this fault.
If you are in automatic mode, check that your J4 input activates and deactivates correctly. Change the
timing of security inhibitions at start-up.
If you use an analogue input for the oil pressure, check Variable E1155: oil pressure threshold.

GENSYS 2.0 Core is powered and LED blinks:
Calibration lost, the GENSYS 2.0 Core must be returned to CRE Technology to be re-calibrated.

GENSYS 2.0 Core displays a "GENSYS CAN Bus" fault:
If the flaw appears during parameter backup, check the connection between GENSYS 2.0 Core units.
Check the number of the set and number of sets is correct, this is in Power plant overview menu.
Check the connection between GENSYS 2.0 Core.
The fault appears when you backup the parameters

GENSYS 2.0 Core displays "breaker failure":
Check that control switch is in manual mode.
Check that J2 (back breaker) is activated. If this entry did not have time to activate, you can increase the
E1149 variable delay.
This fault can occur if the opening of the circuit breaker has not been controlled by the GENSYS 2.0 Core.
See if another module is able to control the circuit breaker.
The engine starts but runs above/ below Rated speed.
Adjust ESG offset or trim speed pot
This output (G9-G11) is used to interface with the speed governor. The main objective being to bias the
speed/fuel rack for synchronizing, Load sharing, ramping Load on and off. This output only alters the Power
(KW) it can be set by parameters E 1077 ESG Offset and E1076 ESG Amplitude (span).
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g

144

When connecting this output you must know the details of the input you are using. For example a Woodward
2301A uses 2.5 Volts input.
Thus the span to achieve the required span ( 2.5Hz) is 2.5 Volts, therefore the settings are E1076=25% and
E1077=25%. If you start the engine with output connected the speed may not be at rated, if so adjust the
speed to be back at rated. N.B. On some electronic engines the input may need configuring with the
manufacturers software. In some case it may be turned off and may not respond.
Only the engine manufacturer can tell you this information.

Below describes how to set the gain and offset if you do not have previously tried settings.
The ESG offset adjustment (E1077) is settable between -10V and +10V, and its added to the
external speed reference (G11) (see figure 47).
The Speed ref (G11) doesnt need to be connected if there is no voltage reference available.

Connect only the ref wire.
Set the gain and offset .You need to know what the ref voltage is and the span

For instance the ref voltage may be 5V and have a span of 2.3 to 2.7 volts, you are trying to achieve the
centre of the voltage span (2.5V) using the setting of E1077 in percent. So 10volts =100%, thus 2.5 equals
25%. So set -25% in E1077. Next you need the span setting in E1076, again 2.3 = 23% and 2.7 =27%. You
need 2% span therefore from the nominal (25%) so set E1076 at 2%.
Start the generator, set rated speed. Stop generator.
Connect the control wire.
Start the generator. Measure the rated Frequency.
If required adjust GENSYS 2.0 Core output voltage a small amount (E1077) thus adjusting the
offset to get back to rated.
Check the maximum range of speed in manual mode with [+] and [-].
This range must be near +/- 3Hz.

When you power up the GENSYS 2.0 Core, the display does not work:
Check the bootstrap button on the back of GENSYS 2.0 Core is off. Remove the power and change the
position of the bootstrap.
If there is no change, the module is defective and needs to be returned to CRE Technology.

If fault occurs while testing speed or voltage:
Check the connection of 0V.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

145

13 Menu overview
13.1 Menu introduction
To have access to the menu you need to have an RDM 2.0 screen or a PC.

Menu is entered when [ESC] key is pressed, and once password has been verified. The password will define
which menu will be accessible:
Level 0: will give access to display menu only.
Level 1: will give access to all menus and level 1 equation.
Level 2: will give access to all menus and level 2 equations.

3 main menus are available:
Display will give information about the genset, bus-bar or mains, and will display real time information and
parameters status.
Configuration is only accessible if you have entered a level 1 or 2 password. You will be able to program
GENSYS 2.0 Core according to the needs of your plat.
System is only accessible if you have entered a level 1 or 2 password. The system menu will let you change
parameters that are not related to the plant, but rather to the GENSYS 2.0 Core system.

13.2 DISPLAY Menu
This menu gives access to the following information:

13.2.1 Generator electrical meter
These meters are displayed in real time. Scrolling through this menu, you will display the following values:
Phase to neutral voltage for each phase [E0000, E0001, E0002]
Phase to phase voltage for each phase [E0003, E0004, E0005]
Current for each phase [E0006, E0007, E0008]
Active power for each phase [E0009, E0010, E0011]
Reactive power for each phase [E0012, E0013, E0014]
Power factor for each phase [E0015, E0016, E0017]
Average active and reactive power, frequency and power factor [E0018, E0019, E0020, E0021]
Active and reactive energy meters [E0025, E0026 / E0125, E0126]
The "Global view" screen will display all parameters listed above on a single screen. This is particularly
useful in pre-commissioning phase.





GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

146

13.2.2 Generator global view

Figure 69 Generator global view

1/ Generator phase to neutral voltages
This screen displays the three phase to neutral voltage measurements.
2/ Generator phase to phase voltages
This screen displays the three phase to phase voltage measurements.
3/ Generator currents
This screen displays the three current measurements.
4/ Generator kW
This screen displays the three kW measurements.
5/ Generator kVAR
This screen displays the three kVAR measurements.
6/ Generator PF
This screen displays the three power factor measurements.
7/ All generator parameters
This screen displays all electrical parameters measurements.
8/ KW meter & kVAR meter
This screen displays KWh and kVARh calculation.

13.2.3 Mains / Bus bars electrical meters
These meters are displayed in real time. Scrolling through this menu, you will display the following values:
Phase to neutral voltage for each phase [E0793, E0794, E0795]
Phase to phase voltage for each phase [E0796, E0797, E0798]
Current for each phase [E0799, E0800, E0801]
Active power for each phase [E0802, E0803, E0804]
Reactive power for each phase [E0805, E0806, E0807]
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

147

Power factor for each phase [E0808, E0809, E0810]
Active and reactive energy meters
The "Global view" screen will display all parameters listed above on a single screen. This is particularly useful
in pre-commissioning phase.

13.2.4 Mains / Bus bars Global view

Figure 70 Mains/Busbars global view

1/ Bus/Mains phase neutral voltages
This screen displays the three phase to neutral voltage measurements.
2/ Bus/Mains phase-phase voltages
This screen displays the three phase to phase voltage measurements.
3/ Bus/Mains currents
This screen displays the three current measurements.
4/ Bus/Mains kW
This screen displays the three kW measurements.
5/ Bus/Mains kVAR
This screen displays the three kVAR measurements.
6/ Bus/Mains PF
This screen displays the three power factor measurements.
7/ All Bus/Mains parameters
This screen displays all Bus/mains parameter measurements.
8/ Bus/Mains KW meter & kVAR meter
This screen displays kWh and kVARh measurements.



GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

148

13.2.5 Synchronization
This page will show:
Synchroscope (phase difference)
Differential frequency (bar graph)
Differential voltage (bar graph).
Synch check relay status (Phase difference, frequency difference, voltage difference, phase sequence)
Phase Offset (shows the parameter [E1929] set for the phase angle shift).

Figure 71 Synchroscope

13.2.6 Power plant overview
This menu will show the power plant parameters (parameters shared by different GENSYS units, for up to
14 generating sets):

1/ Generator 1 to 16
This screen will show the percentage of nominal active power supplied by each genset in real time; [E0042
to E0057]
2/ Generator 1 to 16 kVAR
This screen will show the percentage of nominal reactive power supplied by each genset in real time;
[E0132 to E0147]
3/ Generator 1 to 16 - nominal kW
This screen will show the nominal active power of each genset [E0073 to E0088]
4/ Generator 1 to 16 - nominal kVAR
This screen will show the nominal reactive power of each genset [E0089 to E0104]
5/ Generator 1 to 16 - state code
This screen will show the machine status [E2071] of each genset


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

149

13.2.7 Data logging
5 pages will show the FIFO event data logger selected in the data logger configuration page.
You can download the summary file with a computer connection.
Configuration can be undertaken in: FIFO data logger.
Data login archive can be delete in the menu System/ Date Time meter/. Data loggin reset

13.2.8 Generator fuel control
1/ Speed/kW settings / control
Whatever the configuration (internal or external speed controller, constant power production or peak
shaving...) or the status of the genset (synchronizing, load sharing...) is, all parameters will be displayed.
Depending on the configuration some will remain inactive. The percentage values are between - 7000 and +
7000 percent.
7000 % correction is equal to an increase of + 3 Hz.
Active speed [E2027]: speed set point of the internal governor. Is equal to the value entered in
Configuration/speed control settings menu.
Load pulse [E1074]: is equal to the value entered in Configuration /speed control settings menu.
Speed droop [E1075]: is equal to the value entered in Configuration / speed control settings menu.
Active P setpt [E2048]: Active power set point showed in kW
Gen synchro [E2028]: shows the percentage of correction of synchronization signal
GCR synchro [E2092]: shows the percentage of correction of external synchronization (with mains)
kW // mains [E2029]: shows the percentage of correction of power control when running parallel to the
mains.
Load pulse [E2030]: shows the percentage of load pulse correction (anticipated impact of load).
RPM droop [E2031]: droop correction signal.
kW sharing [E2032]: shows the percentage of correction of active load sharing between gensets.
+/- Hz manu [E2025]: shows the percentage of correction of manual speed control ([+] and [-] keys of the
front panel)
Speed signals [E2058]: sum of the speed correction signals.
2/ Speed/kW meters
Engine speed [E0033]: current engine speed in rpm.
Generator kW [E0018]: current active power.

13.2.9 Generator excitation control
1/ Excitation control settings
Voltage setpoint [E2039]: Voltage signal to AVR (usually the set point of the AVR).
PF // mains [E1110]: power factor set point when generator is paralleled with mains.
Volt droop [E1105]: used when reactive load sharing is not done through the inter GENSYS CAN bus, in
manual mode, and when there is a CAN bus fault.
U=constant [E2033]: shows the percentage of correction sent to the AVR to keep voltage set point.
Volt synchro [E2034]: shows the percentage of voltage synchronization correction signal sent to the AVR.
PF control [E2035]: shows the percentage of correction sent to the AVR to keep power factor set point.
kVAR sharing [E2036]: shows the percentage of correction sent to the AVR for reactive load sharing.
Volt droop [E2037]: shows the percentage of correction sent to the AVR for droop.
Manual volt [E2038]: shows the percentage of correction sent to the AVR by manual control (shift+[+] and
shift+[-] keys of the front panel). This value is equal to zero in auto and test modes.
Excitation [E2040]: sum of the AVR correction signals.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

150

2/ Excitation meters
These show the 3 phase voltages and genset kVAr. [E0000, E0001, E0002, E0019]

13.2.10 Engine meters
On two different screens is the information related to the engine.
All parameters have a bar graph display; whenever a threshold is reached, the bar graph will blink, both on the
GENSYS 2.0 Core screen and on PC with browser.

Figure 72 Engine meters
1/ Engine meters (1/2)
Analogue resistive sensors: oil pressure [E0029], water temperature [E0030], battery voltage [E0040] and
engine speed [E0033].
2/ Engine meters (2/2)
The two spare analogue resistive sensors: [E0031], [E0032]
Total number of starts [E0041], Hours run and User meters 1 & 2 [E0027, E0065, E0066]

13.2.11 Digital inputs/outputs
1/ Digital inputs
This menu shows the status of the 5 dedicated and 10 configurable digital inputs connected on the "J"
terminal, and the status of the emergency stop input. [E2000, E2001, E2002, E2003, E2004, E2005, E2006,
E2007, E2008, E2009, E2010, E2011, E2012, E2013, E2014, E2015]
The name of each input is displayed. Input active =1, Input inactive = 0.
2/ Relay outputs & Digital transistor output
This menu shows the status of the 4 dedicated relay outputs (fuel, crank, genset and mains breakers) and
the 5 configurable digital transistor outputs. [2016, E2017, E2018, E2019, E2020, E2021, E2022, 2023,
E2024]
13.2.12 Timers
This menu shows the timer values running in real time. To change timer values, you should go to
Configuration Menu.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

151

13.2.13 Timers 1/3
Crank timer [E2060]: shows the time before crank relay is energized.
Warm up timer [E2061]: shows the time genset has to wait to warm up before taking the load.
Speed stab [E2062]: shows the time genset has to wait to allow engine speed stabilization before taking the
load.
Volt stab [E2063]: shows the time the genset has to wait to allow voltage stabilization of the engine before
taking the load.
Cooling timer [E2064]: shows the time the genset has to run without load before stopping the engine.
Fail to stop [E2065]: shows the time of the current stop sequence. If engine does not stop when this timer
expires, an alarm will appear.
Stop rest time: [E2066] shows the time the engine has been waiting since being put at rest.
Crank rest [E2067]: shows the time between crank attempts.
Prelub timer [E2084]: shows the pre-lubrication time before cranking.
Preglow timer [E2083]: shows the preheating time before cranking.
TM exct restrt [E2256]: shows the time before giving the AVR a command to supply excitation after a
generator electrical fault.

13.2.14 Timers 2/3
No O/C ma. br. [E2073]: shows the time GENSYS 2.0 Core must wait after a start before having any action
on mains breaker.
No O/C gen br. [E2074]: shows the time GENSYS 2.0 Core must wait after a start before having any action
on genset breaker.
Fail to synchr [E2075]: when synchronizing in auto mode, this timer defines the time to determine if
synchronization has failed.
Ramp up timer [E2081]: shows the time to take the load with a load ramp.
Ramp dwn timer [E2082]: shows the time to lose the load with an unload ramp.
Bef power down [E2239]: shows the time to stop other gensets when low load level is reached (see
configuration / automatic load / unload)
Bef power up [E2240]: shows the time to start other gensets when high load level is reached (see
configuration / automatic load / unload)
MA back timer [E2091]: In changeover configuration, shows the time to wait when mains returns.

13.2.15 Timers 3/3
This menu gives all user meters, 1 to 5, hours and days.

13.2.16 Serial number / Soft version
This information screen will display the serial number of the GENSYS 2.0 Core you are currently using and
its software version. This information is useful for firmware information.


13.3 CONFIGURATION Menu
This menu will allow parameter configuration.
The Basic configuration is accessible to everybody and must be configured for each application.
The Enhanced configuration is accessible to confirmed engineers and gives access to advanced parameter
configuration.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

152

13.4 Basic Configuration Menu
Will give access to the following menus where parameters can be modified:

13.4.1 Power plant overview
1/ Power plant
Parameter
[var. num.]
possible
value
comment
Gen. number
[E1179]:
Is the number given to this particular GENSYS 2.0 Core on the power
plant.
Nb of gen.
[E1147]:
Is the total number of GENSYS 2.0 Core installed on the power plant.
Nb of Masters
[E4006]:
Is the total number of Masters (module for mains control) installed
on the power plant.
Mains paralel.
[E1148]:
only use if nb
of gen. [1147]
is 1
ChangeOver/
0
On mains failure, engine starts and takes the load by opening mains
breaker and closing genset breaker with interlocking. On mains
return, unload genset by opening genset breaker and closing mains
breaker with interlocking, and stop engine.
Fugitive/1 Only available with mains paralleling option
Same as changeover mode but loading/unloading is made without
black, with ramps after synchronization with mains.
Permanent/2 Only available with mains paralleling option
after a start demand, GENSYS 2.0 Core will synchronize genset to
mains and keep both breakers closed.
No ch.over/3 GENSYS 2.0 Core must receive a start demand and will not manage
mains breaker output. There will be no synchronization with the bus
bar or the mains.
Mains regul.
[E1153]
only available
with mains
paralleling
option
only use if nb
of gen. [E1147]
is 1
Peak shav./1 GENSYS 2.0 Core will permanently vary genset power to maintain
constant power supply from mains.
Base load/2 GENSYS 2.0 Core will permanently maintain genset power.
ILS compatible
[E1158]
Yes/0 Load sharing will be done via analogue bus (pins G4 and G6).
No/1 Load sharing will be done via inter GENSYS digital CAN bus (Com 2
port).
Synchro mode
[E1177]
Dynamic/0 Standard synchronization: will be carried out by adjusting engine
speed and generator voltage.
Static/1 Is to be selected if breakers are closed before engine starting and
generator excitation.
Deadbus
manag.
[E1515]
Yes/0 Dead bus management will be done via inter GENSYS digital CAN
bus (Com 2 port).
No/1 External logic controls dead bus management.
Table 43 - Power plant configuration

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

153

2/ Mains electrical fault
Open breaker [E1846]: Open breaker: you select the breaker that will be opened upon a "Mains electrical
fault". You can select the "Mains" breaker or the "Generator" breaker or "both".
Start on fault [E1841]: Fault start: will allow the engine to start on a "Mains electrical fault". You can select
"Yes" to start the engine or "No".
Start delay [E1840]: is the delay between the "Mains electrical fault" and the engine start. It will delay a digital
or virtual input. For an internal detection, this delay overrides the delay of the protection.
No load delay [E1842]: No load delay (60.0): is the delay during which the engine runs without load, when the
generator breaker is open. If the delay is 0, the generator will never stop.

3/ Generator electrical fault
TM re-synch. [E1843]: is the delay before the generator tries to re-synchronize with Mains after a "Generator
electrical fault".
Nb re-synch. [E1844]: is the number of attempts to re-synchronize.
In case of a generator electrical fault, the generator breaker is opened and the GENSYS 2.0 Core is in state
40. In this state the alternator is de-excited (if wired) during a delay (E1265). After this delay, if the fault is
still present there is a hard shut down; otherwise GENSYS 2.0 Core tries to re-synchronize.

13.4.2 Gen/Mains electrical settings
1/ Mains/Bus
This page describes the parameters used to configure the Mains or the bus bar voltage connected to the
GENSYS 2.0 Core
MA kW <-> 20mA[1020]: is the power measured by an external transducer delivering 20 mA (or 10V if a
voltage output transducer is used) to the power input of GENSYS 2.0 Core (pins G1 and G3).
MA 0kW setting [E1021]: is the current to the power input of GENSYS 2.0 Core (pins G1 and G3) delivered
by an external transducer measuring 0 kW.
Ex: a 4-20ma transducer is used. 20ma corresponds to 500KW --> E1020=500; E1021=4;
MA PT ratio [E1016]: is the ratio of your voltage transformer on the mains/busbar side (E.g. 20 kV to 100 V:
type in 200).
MA back timer [E1085]: if genset is in Change Over configuration, this is the time GENSYS 2.0 Core will wait
to ensure a stable mains return.
Mains KW Meas.[E1464]:
External: measurement of mains power by external power transducer (pins G1 and G3);
Internal: calculation of mains power from the single phase measurement of GENSYS 2.0 Core.
Ext kW measure[E1461]: choose 10V for voltage output external transducer, 20mA for current output
external transducer.
Mains voltage [E4008]: is the nominal Mains voltage (used for protection %).
Mains freq. [E4009]: is the nominal Mains frequency (used for protection %)

2/ Generator
This page describes the parameters used to configure the generator.
Gen nominal kW [E1006]: is the nominal power of your genset.
kW nominal 2 [E1607]: is a second nominal power for your genset, activated with logical input or
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

154

equations.
Gen PT ratio [E1007]: is the ratio of your voltage transformers (E.g. 20 kV to 100 V: type in 200).
Gen CT1 ratio [E1008]: is the ratio of your phase 1 current transformer (E.g. 100A to 5A: type in 20).
Gen CT2 ratio [E1009]: is the ratio of your phase 2 current transformer.
Gen CT3 ratio [E1010]: is the ratio of your phase 3 current transformer.
Gen nom kVAR [E1015]: is the nominal reactive power of your genset.
kVAR nominal 2[E1636]: is a second nominal reactive power for your genset, activated with logical input or
equations.

13.4.3 Speed control settings
1/ Speed common settings
Speed measure [E1078]: Magnetic recommended if a magnetic pickup can be wired to G7 and G8 pins of
GENSYS 2.0 Core; otherwise, choose Alternator for speed measurement on generator frequency.
Nb of teeth [E1106]: number of teeth on the fly wheel (necessary if "magnetic" has been chosen as speed
measurement source).
Pole pair nb [E1109]: number of pairs of poles on the generator (necessary if "alternator" has been chosen
as speed measurement source).
Load pulse [E1074]: is the percentage of correction sent to speed governing system to anticipate a sudden
load demand and prevent a decreasing speed in island mode or a too slow kW variation.
Speed droop [E1075]: droop of the internal speed controller.
Idle speed [E1079]: engine idle speed of the internal speed controller; this should be set to speed 1 value if
the internal speed controller option is not used. If this feature is used, the engine will accelerate from crank
disconnect value to idle speed; then the speed will increase, following a ramp from idle speed to nominal
speed during the time set in "speed ramp up".
Speed 1 [E1080]: first (default) speed set point
Speed 2 [E1081]: second speed set point (if required for PLC programming or use with digital input).
TM sensor lost [E1458]: time after which GENSYS 2.0 Core will trigger a "sensor lost" security fault if no
signal is read from speed measurement input.

2/ External speed governor
ESG amplitude [E1076]: to be set between -100 % for +10V to -10V output to external speed controller,
and 100 % for -10V to +10V output.
This value must be set to have a GENSYS 2.0 Core control speed deviation of +/- 3Hz on the engine. You can
test it in Manual mode, by pressing [+] or [-]. To apply the maximum correction signal to the output, you
must press as long as the variable E2058 equals +/- 7000.
ESG offset [E1077]: voltage on output to external speed controller without correction: between -100 % for
-10V and +100% for +10V.
The offset E1077 sets the voltage output of SpeedOut G11 when the GENSYS 2.0 Core applies no
correction. You can find pre calibration tips in the application note (Z090100.pdf). However, these
settings have to be adjusted during commissioning to match the physical requirements of your genset.

3/ Super Droop settings
In this mode the load sharing is managed between Droop Max frequency [E1972] (0% load) and the Droop
Min Frequency [E1973] (100% load).
The Speed droop [E1075] (droop of the internal speed controller is always active and added to the Super
Droop).
Factory setting for GPID should work for most power plants. Take care before modification.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

155


Figure 73 GPID factory setting

13.4.4 Excitation control settings
1/ AVR control
Volt droop [E1105]: is the droop sent to AVR if reactive load sharing is undertaken with droop (if not using
inter GENSYS 2.0 CAN bus or in manual mode).
Volt setpoint1 [E1107]: first (default) voltage set point.
Volt setpoint2 [E1108]: second voltage set point (if required for PLC programming or use with digital
input).
cos()setpoint [E1110]: power factor set point when running parallel to the mains.
AVR gain [E1103]: to be set between 0 and 255 to set the AVR trip.
AVR offset [E1104]: output voltage to AVR, to be set between 0 and 255.
You can find pre calibration tips in the corresponding chapter. However, these settings have to be adjusted
while commissioning to match the physical requirements of your genset.
Manual colt [E2038]: shows the percentage of correction sent to the AVR after manual modification of
voltage (shift+[+] and shift+[-] keys on the front panel); this value equals zero in auto and test modes.
Generator V1 [E0000]: is the voltage measurement between neutral and phase 1.

2/ cos() PID
This screen lets you adjust the PID settings of the power factor control when parallel to the mains:
G= overall gain [E1119](multiplies the sum of the following settings), P= proportional gain [E1120], I=
integral [E1121], D= derivative [E1122].

Figure 74 Cos phi PID
While you adjust the PID settings of the power factor control, the following parameters are displayed:
Generator active and reactive power (P and Q), engine speed, pf set point, pf phase 1, 2 and 3, global pf.




GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

156

3/ kVAr shar. gain
When reactive load sharing is active: set the gain (G) for kVAr sharing [E1123].

Figure 75 kVAR shar. gain

While you adjust the PID settings of reactive power control, the following parameters are displayed:
Generator active and reactive power (P and Q), engine speed, generator Voltage (phase 1), reactive power
set point, 3 phase reactive load.

13.4.5 Protections
For each of the following protections, you can set a level LV, a timer TM, and an Action CT. The action CT
will be activated if the Level LV is reached after the timer TM.
Please refer to the protection configuration page or the table bellow for more details.

1/ Generator Protections
On the generator side, the following protections are available:

Protection function [Level, Timer, Function]
Gen. under freq. protection [E1025,E1026,E1027]
Gen. over freq protection[E1022,E1023,E1024]
Gen. under volt protection [E1028,E1029,E1030]
Gen. over volt protection[E1031,E1032,E1033]
Gen. mini kVAR protection[E1034,E1035,E1036]
Gen. maxi kVAR protection[E1037,E1038,E1039]
Gen. reverse kW protection[E1040,E1041,E1042]
Gen. reverse kVAR protection[E1043,E1044,E1045]
Generator mini kW protection[E1046,E1047,E1048]
Generator maxi kW protection[E1049,E1050,E1051]
Gen. max current protection[E1052,E1053,E1054]
Gen. max neutral I protection[E1055,E1056,E1057]






GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

157

2/ Mains Protections
On the Mains side, the following protections are available:
Protection function [Level, Timer, Function]
Gen. under freq. protection [E1058,E1059,E1060]
Gen. over freq protection[E1061,E1062,E1063]
Gen. under volt protection [E1064,E1065,E1066]
Gen. over volt protection[E1067,E1068,E1069]

3/ Engine / battery Protections
Miscellaneous protections:
Under speed protection [E1163,E1164,E1165]
Over speed protection[E1160,E1161,E1162]
Min. oil pressure protection [E1166,E1167,E1168]
Max. water temp. protection [E1169,E1170,E1171]
Engine measure 1 protection [E1180,E1181,E1182]
Engine measure 2 protection [E1184,E1185,E1186]
Battery min voltage [E1172,E1173,E1174]
Battery max voltage [E1086,E1095,E1098]
Thresholds of measures 1 to 4:
Oil threshold [E1175]
Oil hysteresis [E1176]
Water temp. threshold [E1426]
Water temp. hysteresis [E1427]
Measure 1 threshold [E1428]
Measure 1 hysteresis [E1429]
Measure 2 threshold [E1430]
Measure 2 hysteresis [E1431]

13.5 Enhanced Configuration Menu
Will give access to the following menus where parameters can be modified:

13.5.1 Power plant overview
Same menu as Basic configuration

13.5.2 Start / Stop sequence
1/ Timers
This page describes the parameters used to set the start sequence of the engine
Prelub time [E1145]: is the time GENSYS 2.0 Core will energize a prelube output for a lubrication pump
before cranking.
Preglow time [E1157]: is the time GENSYS 2.0 Core will energize a preglow output for preheat plugs before
cranking.
Crank time [E1135]: is the maximum time for which the crank relay is energized during a start attempt.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

158

Crank RestTime [E1136]: is the time GENSYS 2.0 Core will wait between two cranking attempts.
Warm up time [E1139]: is the time the genset will wait before taking the load to allow the engine to warm up.
RPM stab. time [E1140]: when genset is started, this is the time GENSYS 2.0 Core will wait before triggering an
alarm because of an unstable speed.
Volt stab time [E1141]: when genset is started, this is the time GENSYS 2.0 Core will wait before triggering an
alarm because of an unstable voltage.
Safety ON time [E1514]: is the time during which GENSYS 2.0 Core will not activate protections (e.g. oil
pressure, under-speed...) when starting the engine.
Cooling time [E1142]: is the time the engine will run without load before stopping.
Rest time [E1144]: is the minimum time the engine will wait before re-starting after being put at rest.
Eng. Stop time [E1143]: is the time after which the engine is considered to be not stopped.
RemStart delay [E1190]: is the remote start latency time.


Figure 76 Timers

2/ Crank settings
Start attempts [E1134]: is the minimum number of start attempts.
Nb. Of starter [E1138]: is the minimum time the engine will wait before re-start after being put at rest.
Cra.1 drop out [E1325]: is the speed (RPM) above which the engine is considered to be started for crank 1.
Cra.2 drop out [E1326]: is the speed (RPM) above which the engine is considered to be started for crank 2.
Cra.3 drop out [E1327]: is the speed (RPM) above which the engine is considered to be started for crank 3.

3/ Checks before starting
Water temp. [E1154]: Pre-heat is activated if J6 is closed and if temperature is under the preset threshold
(E0030 < E1154).
Oil prelub [E1155]: Pre-lubrication will be activated when engine state is pre-start (E2057 = 1) and if
pressure is under the threshold (E0029 < E1155). If the threshold (E1155) is 0, then pre-lubrication is active
while the engine state is pre-start (E2057 = 1). In this last case, an oil pressure sensor isnt required.
Max time [E1146]: is the longest acceptable delay for engine start.
Cooling thresh [E1178]: AIR FAN is activated when temperature is over the preset threshold (E1178) and
deactivated when water temperature is lower than 80% of the threshold. AIR FAN is not active when
engine is stopped (E2057=0).


13.5.3 Gen/Mains electrical settings
Same as "Basic configuration/Gen/Mains electrical settings" menu.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

159

13.5.4 Protections
Same as "Basic configuration/Protections" menu.

13.5.5 Breaker settings
This menu is used for breaker configuration. Each of the 2 breakers (Generator and Mains) can be configured
with 5 different values from table below:

0 = open contact close pulse
1 = open contact close contact
2 = open MXcoil close pulse
3 = open MXcoil close pulse
4 = open pulse close pulse
5 = open pulse close contact
Table 44 - Breaker settings

Mains brk ctrl [E1992]: This is the mains breaker control.
Gen brk ctrl [E1993]: This is the generator breaker control.

It is also possible to change the pulse timer:
UV coil rst TM [E1994]: Timer for the negative impulsion of the low voltage coil.
UV coil pre TM [E1995]: Safety timer for the low voltage coil.

13.5.6 Speed control settings
Same as "Basic configuration/ Speed control settings" menu.

13.5.7 Excitation control settings
Same as "Basic configuration/Excitation control settings" menu.

13.5.8 Active power regulation
1/ Generator kW settings
Gen low lim [E1091]: is the lower power limit of the genset; enter a value (in kW) that will prevent reverse
power protection triggering.
Gen high lim [E1092]: is the upper power limit of the genset; enter a value (in kW).
Ge kWsetpoint1[E1093]: is the genset kW set point in constant production mode.
Ge kWsetpoint2[E1094]: is a second genset kW set point in constant production mode. Can be used in
association with digital inputs. Optional.
Load ramp [E1151]: time to ramp up from lower limit to required power output.
Unload ramp [E1152]: time to ramp down from required power output to lower power limit.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

160

2/ Mains kW settings (only available with mains paralleling option)
MA kWsetpoint1[E1096]: is the mains power set point in peak shaving mode.
MA kWsetpoint2[E1097]: is a second mains kW set point in peak shaving mode. Optional.

3/ kW sharing GPI
When genset is sharing the load with other gensets: G= overall gain (multiplies the sum of the following
settings)[E1102], P= proportional gain,[E1900] I= integral [E1901].
The Global Gain for the central Frequency is [E1902].
The right hand side of the table only displays values that allow easy setting.

Figure 77 - kW sharing GPI

13.5.9 P= Constant (Gen//mains), (only available with mains
paralleling option)
This screen lets you adjust the Proportional and Integral power management settings when a single genset
is running parallel to the mains:
G= overall gain (multiplies the sum of the following settings[E1099]), P= proportional gain[E1100], I=
integral[E1101].

Figure 78 P=const PI
While you adjust the PID settings of active power control, the following parameters are displayed:
Generator active and reactive power (P and Q), engine speed, generator Voltage (phase 1), frequency, sum
of the speed signals (in %).

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

161

13.5.10 Synchronization
1/ Synch check relay
Voltage match [E1127]: is the maximum difference (in percent) between genset and busbar voltage that
allows the synch check relay to operate.
Freq. match [E1128]: is the maximum frequency difference between genset and busbar that allows the synch
check relay to operate.
Phase match [E1129]: is the maximum phase angle difference allowed between genset and busbar for the
sync check relay to operate.
Min volt [E1432]: is the minimal percentage of nominal voltage on both sides of the breaker to allow sync
check relay to operate.
Max volt [E1433]: is the maximal percentage of nominal voltage allowed on both sides of the breaker for the
sync check relay to operate.
Min frequency [E1434]: is the minimal percentage of nominal frequency allowed on both sides of the breaker
for the sync check relay to operate.
Max frequency [E1435]: is the maximal percentage of nominal frequency allowed on both sides of the breaker
for the sync check relay to operate.
Fail to synchr[E1150]: this timer will trigger a fail to synchronize protection if genset has not synchronized
within the time you enter.
CT Fail synchr[E1928]: this selects the course of action in case of impossible synchronization; Please refer
to the protection configuration for details

2/ Voltage synchronization PID
This screen lets you adjust the PID settings of the output to AVR:
G= overall gain (multiplies the sum of the following settings) [E1130], P= proportional gain[E1131], I=
integral[E1132], D= derivative[E1133].

Figure 79 Synchro volt PID

While you adjust the PID settings, the following parameters are displayed: Generator active and reactive
power (P and Q), frequency, generator phase to phase Voltages (U
12
, U
23
, U
31
), Bus phase to phase voltage
(U
13
), Bus frequency.

3/ Synchroscope for frequency and phase PID settings
This screen lets you adjust the PID settings for faster frequency and phase matching:
Frequency PID
G= overall gain (multiplies the sum of the following settings [E1111]), P= proportional gain [E1112], I=
integral [E1113], D= derivative [E1114].
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

162

Phase PID
G= overall gain (multiplies the sum of the following settings)[E1307], P= proportional gain[E1308], I=
integral[E1309], D= derivative [E1310].

Figure 80 Synchroscope frequency & phase PID
The internal GENSYS 2.0 Core synchroscope is displayed and lets you monitor in real time the changes you
make on these parameters.

13.5.11 Digital outputs
Outputs 1 to 5: [E1260, E1261, E1262, E1262, E1264], function and polarity have to be defined. The relays
"Crank" and "Fuel" can be set for other functions. See 3 below.

1/ Possible output functions:
Detailed list of useable output functions is given in chapter 7.2.1
2/ Polarity:
For each of the five outputs, two options are possible:
NE: normally energised; the output will de-energize when required, depending on its function.
ND: normally de-energized; the output will energize when required.
3/ Fuel Crank Special functions:
The relays "Crank" and "Fuel" can be set for other functions. The initial settings are for Crank and Fuel.
Polarity cannot be changed on these relay outputs. Crank output function is settable with [E1989]; Fuel
output function settable with [E1916].
For Fuel: If E1916= "Unused" the initial settings apply, with E2019 to the A2output (fuel).
Other functions for this output can be selected in the list.
For Crank: If E1989= "Unused" the initial settings apply, with E2018 to the A1output (crank).
Other functions for this output can be selected in the list.

13.5.12 Virtual digital inputs
Virtual digital inputs are designed to offer more features to the end user. They can be programmed via
equations or can copy the status of external (CAN Open linked) inputs. For virtual digital inputs 1 to 40:
label, validity, direction, and function have to be defined.
Variable numbers: [E2283 to E2302 and E2565 to E2584]

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

163

1/ Label:
The name you give to the virtual input. This will be displayed in the info, alarm, and fault screens if so
programmed.

2/ Validity:
Virtual input validity variable numbers: [E1348 to E1357 / E1388 to E1397 / E1640 to E1659] can be set as:
Never [E2329]: never active: should be selected if you do not use the input.
Always [E2330]: always active: input will be monitored as long as GENSYS 2.0 Core has power supply.
Post-Starting [E2192]: the input will be monitored at the end of the "safety on" timer.
Stabilized [E2331]: The input will be monitored when genset frequency and voltage are stable.
Spare scenario: [E2332]: input will be monitored as programmed in equations.

3/ Direction:
Virtual input direction variable numbers: [E1358 to E1367 / E1398 to E1407 / E1659 to E1679]. Can be set
as:
NO [0]: normally open; should be selected unless the input is used for protection.
NC [1]: normally closed. This should be selected if the input is normally connected to 0V and opens when
active.

4/ Accuracy
This parameter sets accuracy (number of digits after decimal point). Possible values are:
1
0.1
0.01
0.001

5/ Functions:
Virtual input function variable numbers: [E1328 to E1337 / E1368 to E1377 / E1680 to E1699] can be set as
described in chapter 7.1.5. Note that both virtual and real inputs use the same functions.

13.5.13 Digital inputs
They are split into dedicated and configurable inputs. For Digital inputs 1 to 10 [E2006, E2007, E2008,
E2009, E2010, E2011, E2012, E2013, E2014, E2015]: label, validity, direction and function have to be
defined, as for dedicated inputs. Polarity must also be defined on input variable numbers: [E2000, E2001,
E2002, E2003, E2004].

1/ Configurable input labels:
It is the name you give to the input, and will be displayed in the info, alarm, and fault screens if so
programmed.

2/ Validity
Input validity variable numbers: [E1287 to E1296] can be set as:
Never: [E2329]: never active: should be selected if you do not use the input.
Always: [E2330]: always active: input will be monitored as long as GENSYS 2.0 Core has power supply.
Post-Starting: [E2192]: input will be monitored at the end of the "safety on" timer.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

164

Stabilized: [E2331]: the input will be monitored when genset frequency and voltage are stable.
Spare scenario: [E2332]: input will be monitored as programmed in equations.

3/ Direction:
Input direction variable numbers: [E1297 to E1306].
For each of the ten inputs, two options are possible:
NO [0]: normally open; should be selected unless the input is used for protection.
NC [1]: normally closed. This should be selected if the input is normally connected to 0V and is open when
active.

4/ Delays:
Delays for input variable numbers are: [E1277 to E1286 ]

5/ Possible functions:
Input function variable numbers: [E1267 to E1286] can be set as described in chapter 7.1.5. Note that
virtual and real inputs use the same functions.

6/ Dedicated inputs
In the menu list each input is named after its pin number on the wiring of GENSYS 2.0 Core. Polarity can be
normally open or normally closed. Program this according to the wiring you will have on site.
As a reminder: J1 is Mains breaker position, J2 is Genset breaker position, J3 is remote start input, J4 is oil
pressure switch and J5 is coolant temperature switch. [E2000, E2001, E2002, E2003, E2004]

13.5.14 Configuration of analogue inputs
1/ 1/ Units
Oil pressure measure (O. P. Input) unit should be chosen between mBar, kPa, PSI.
Water temperature measure (W. T. Input) unit should be chosen between C, F.
Spare Analogue measures 1 and 2: you should give them a name, and decide which unit shall be displayed
among the following:
No unit, V, kV, mA, A, kA, Hz, kW, kWh, kVAR, kVARh, rpm, %, Bar, mBar, kPa, PSI, , C, F, L, Gal, s, h, days,
Hz/s, m3/h, L/h, Gal/h.

2/ 2/ Calibration
A/ 0-400 Ohms sensor calibration: Oil Pressure and Water Temp: this menu relates to the dedicated
analogue inputs (oil pressure and coolant temperature). Please enter the pressure or temperature read
by your sensors according to the resistance shown in the calibration table.
Oil Temperature calibration points are [E1188 to E1198], which correspond to 0 to 400 Ohms
Water Temp. calibration points are [E1199 to E1209], which correspond to 0 to 400 Ohms.
B/ Engine measurements 1 and 2:
Spare engine measure 1 calibration points are [E1210 to E1220].
Spare engine measure 1 impedance points are [E1188 to E1198].
Spare engine measure 2 calibration points are [E1232 to E1242].
Spare engine measure 2 impedance points are [ E1199 to E1209].

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

165

You can find a calibration graph for different sensors in application note Z090101.pdf.

13.5.15 CANopen
1/ Input message configuration
Input messages 1 to 13:
For each message transmitted from the external block to GENSYS 2.0 Core, please specify:
mod_id_inX: For message number X (1 to 13), the ID number of the remote inputs module. [E1518 to
E1530]

type_in_messX: For message number X (1 to 13), whether the inputs are "digital" [1]or "analogue"[2] if
not used, choose "Unused"[0]. [E1531 to E1543]

nb_in_messX: For message number X (1 to 13), the number of inputs received from the remote inputs
module. [E1544 to E1556]

2/ Output message configuration
Output messages 1 to 19.
For each message transmitted from GENSYS 2.0 Core to the external block, please specify:

mod_id_out_X: For message number X (1 to 19), the ID number of remote outputs module. [E1557 to
E1569] & [E1875 to E1880]

type_out_messX: For message number X (1 to 19), whether the outputs are "digital" or "analogue"; if not
used, choose "Unused".[E1570 to E1582] & [E1881 to E1886]

nb_out_messX: for message number X (1 to 19), the number of outputs sent to the remote outputs
module.[E1583 to E1596] & [E1887 to E1892]

3/ Launch modules configuration
Launch modules configuration *E1603+: this is not really a menu, but a GO BUTTON. This variable is
always set to NO by default. When you force it to YES, GENSYS 2.0 Core restarts configuration of all
external CANopen modules. Afterwards, GENSYS 2.0 Core resets to NO. It is good practice to use this
after a CANopen configuration modification.



For each of the two spare sensors, please indicate on
the right hand side (min and max boxes) the operating
range of each of your sensors; then, give the value to
be displayed for each tenth of difference between min
and max values.
E. g: min = 3000, max =6000, gives the values
corresponding to 3000, 3300, 3600, 3900, 4200, 4500,
4800,..., 5700, 6000 Ohms. These can be used in
equations or displayed.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

166

13.5.16 Modification by variable number
This menu item is very useful when you are familiar with key variable numbers, for example the ones you
modify often. Simply enter the variable number, and then enter its value. Please refer to GENSYS 2.0 Core
technical documentation for list of parameter or variable numbers.
Note: You can only change the parameters (settings), from E1006 to E1999. Some of these settings are not
accessible from other menus.
The second field in this page allows you to configure the writing ability via Modbus or PLC (equations). This is
also visible and settable in the third column of the parameters file. Y (Yes) = allowed / N (No) = not allowed.

Figure 81 Modification by variable number

13.5.17 Special functions
Will give access to the following menus where parameters can be modified:
1/ Automatic load/unload
2/ Heavy consumer control
3/ Non essential consumer trip
4/ Phase Offset
Refer to corresponding Chapters

13.5.18 Inhibit variables
In these pages you can change the Inhibit variables value.
1/ Inhibit variables 1/2
Inhibit variable 1: [E1608] = Auto start sequence.
This is used when the engine has got is own automatic start module. The start sequence is redundant in the
system.

Inhibit variable 2: [E1609] = BV Option
This option is used for Marine Bureau VERITAS applications.

Inhibit variable 3: [E1610] = Custom option
Used to set mains meter / used for G59 setting.

Inhibit variable 4: [E1611] = I/O swapped on COM 2.
COM 2 is the standard port for transmission, the inhibit variable switches transmission to COM 1.

Inhibit variable 5: [E1612] =Inhibition E2071
Used to inhibit E2071 (Machine status): No Power management.

Inhibit variable 6: [E1613] =Front face without keys and LEDs.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

167

Inhibits LEDs and keys of the lower part of the front panel.

Inhibit variable 7: [E1614] = IMTECH option.
Activates the SEMI AUTO mode instead of the TEST mode.

Inhibit variable 8: [E1615] = Modification for SEDNI application.
Specific application for SEDNI (Spain).

Inhibit variable 9: [E1616] = InterGENSYS CAN on COM3 (Can2).

Inhibit variable 10: [E1617] =Number of priority with "custom" load/unload sequence (E1258=3)
Used to set the priority number for load/unload application. (E1258=3)

2/ Inhibit variables 2/2
Inhibit variable 11: [E1618] = Synchronization for low response time engine.
Frequency synchronization window is set at 0.1 Hz instead of 1 HZ (before activating the phase
synchronization).

Inhibit variable 12: [E1619] = KVAR auto start and stop.
Used to set the Stop/start request with Kvar and Kw threshold, instead of Kw only.

Inhibit variable 13: [E1620] = Operator controlled return of mains (+ E2584).
With E1620=1, when the mains voltage returns, GENSYS 2.0 Core waits for a command (E2584=1) before
re-synchronizing (Engine to mains).

Inhibit variable 14: [E1621] =NOT USED YET
Inhibit variable 15: [E1622] =NOT USED YET
Inhibit variable 16: [E1623] =NOT USED YET
Inhibit variable 17: [E1624] =NOT USED YET
Inhibit variable 18: [E1625] =NOT USED YET
Inhibit variable 19: [E1626] =NOT USED YET
Inhibit variable 20: [E1627] =NOT USED YET
13.5.19 Maintenance cycles
This page is for the selection for maintenance cycles, on hour or in days.
5 hour cycles and 5 day counters are available.
Label: Name of the alarm displayed when the counter matches the cycle time.
Cycle time: [E1442 to E1451]. Number of hours or days for the timer.
When these parameters are different from zero, the variables E2304 to E2313 are automatically
incremented (in hours / days in) and saved on memory. When the variable E23nn is greater or equal to
the variable E14nn, an alarm is set on.
Meter: [E2304 to E2313]. Counter which starts after selecting the corresponding "cycle time".
Reset: When pressed, resets the corresponding counter.

13.5.20 Fifo data logger
Log on/off: [E1988] is set to "On" to enable the data logger.
Log Var 1 to Log Var 10: Set here the variable value you want to watch. When set to "-1" the Log Var is
disabled.
These values are displayed in the Data logging display page.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

168

13.5.21 J1939/MDEC
1/ CAN Protocol
Com2 protocol: [E1855]: Select 0 for CANopen protocol, 1 for MTU MDEC engine, and 2 for CANopen + J1939
communication engine.
J1939 Engine selection: [E4034]: select the J1939 Engine you want in the list.
1=Scania 5= Standard
2=Volvo 6= Custom
3=Perkins 7= Cummins
4=Iveco

This automatically sets the internal configuration of the GENSYS 2.0 Core for the requested engine type.
Contact CRE technical support for more information on GENSYS 2.0 Core J1939 communication and other
J1939 engine types available.

2/ Configuration
Depending on the CAN protocol selected, the navigation arrow selects the correct configuration page:

3/ J1939
J1939 Address [E1856]: this is the address of the GENSYS 2.0 Core unit on the J1939 bus.
Engine Speed [E1854]
Coolant temp [E1853]
Oil Pressure [E1852]
Select the associated function for each protection displayed. If you chose an engine in the previous list
some values are automatically set and you cannot modify them. If you want to modify all values please
select "none": E4034=0.
For more details please contact CRE support.

4/ MTU
This menu is used to choose actions for each of the MTU protocol parameters.
Select the associated function for each protection displayed.
CT speed [E1857]
CT Oil Pres [E1858]
CT Cool Temp + [E1859]
CT Oil Pres [E1860]
CT Cool Temp++ [E1861]
CT speed ++ [E1862]
CT Malfunction [E1863]
CT Protection [E1864]
CT Orange [E1865]
CT Red [E1866]
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

169

Opt4Param12 [E1867]
Opt4Param13 [E1868]
Opt4Param14 [E1869]
Opt4Param15 [E1870]
Opt4Param16 [E1871]

13.6 SYSTEM Menu
This will give access to the following menus which display system parameters; some of them can be modified:

13.6.1 Date / Time / Meters
1/ Date / Time
Here you can choose Date format (dd/mm/year or mm/dd/year) and set Date and Time.

2/ Meters reset
You can reset the meters using the software on your PC or via the front panel by selecting "reset". The
following meters are set to zero:
Gen. kW sum [E0025];
Gen. kVAR sum [E0125];
Mains kW sum [E0061];
Mains kVAR sum[E0063];
Hours run [E0065];
Nb of starts [E0027];
User meter 1 [E2657] : settable in the following page
User meter 2 [E2659] : settable in the following page
Data logging [E1988]:

3/ Dedicated meter settings
For the two dedicated meters [E2657] and [E2659] you can chose:
The name of the meter
The unit of the meter. V, kV, mA, A, kA, Hz, kW, kWh, kVAR, kVARh, rpm, %, Bar, mBar, kPa, PSI, ,
C, F, L, Gal, s, h, days, Hz/s, m3/h, L/h, Gal/h
The accuracy of the meter.

13.6.2 Password / Options
1/ Passwords
This screen allows you to change passwords, from level 0 to the currently connected level. Passwords are
limited to 8 characters maximum.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

170

2/ Options
Displays only the options active on your GENSYS 2.0 Core. For more information on options, or to lock/unlock
one of them, please contact your local CRE technology distributor. OFF is an inactive option, ON is an active
option.
2: Mains paralleling option. For single generator paralleled with the mains (Phase shift + ROCOF + power
management + display).
5: Enable the coupling function.
6: Master 2. This is a "factory only" configurable option. This option is set to OFF on GENSYS 2.0 Core, and set
to ON in the Master2.
8: Phase offset option. This option is generally used with HIGH VOLTAGE transformer applications.

13.6.3 GENSYS 2.0 Core screen saver
1/ Introduction
The screen displayed when user does not interact with GENSYS 2.0 Core (keys not used) is called SCREEN
SAVER. Information displayed on this screen is automatically chosen depending on GENSYS 2.0 Core
status, as described in table below. Some parameters can also be used to customize this behaviour.
Screensaver Description Display in auto
mode
Display in Manu
mode
Synchronization
column
Frequency difference (bar graph)
Voltage difference (bar graph)
Phase difference (column)
Frequency match (OK/NOK)
Voltage match (OK/NOK)
Phase match (OK/NOK)
In synchronization
state
When the
generator is
ready and the
generator
breaker is open
Generator
overview
KW (in large font)
Voltage (in large font)
Running hours (in large font)
When the
generator breaker
is closed
When the
generator
breaker is closed
Engine overview Crank relay output
Fuel relay output
Water temp digital output
Oil pressure digital output
Emergency stop
Remote start
Nb of start attempts
Battery voltage (bar graph)
Engine speed (bar graph)
In start and fault
state
When you press
start, or when in
fault state
Customized screen 4 custom lines
Customer logo
Current date and time
In wait state
(engine stopped)
In other cases
Table 45 - Screensaver modes
2/ Menu
TM scr saver [1266]: set the time (in minutes) after which the front panel display will exit menus and show
the screen saver.
Line 1 to Line 4: the 4 lines of text displayed in the Customized screen can be modified as well. Each line
can be up to 28 characters in length.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

171

Note: if you change this text from your computer, make sure your "PC language" is the same as the "local
language", as the text displayed is local language related; for more information, refer to the next chapter.

13.6.4 Back light timer / Languages
1/ Back light timer

Horn delay [1991]: Time (in seconds) after which the horn goes off.
TM back light [1014]: This sets the time (in minutes) after which the front panel display backlight will be
switched off. The light will be switched on again as soon as a key is pressed on the front panel.
PC language: Allows you to choose the language of the menus displayed on your computer.
Local language: Allows you to choose the language of the menus displayed on your GENSYS 2.0 Core front
panel.

13.6.5 Serial port configuration
This menu is mainly for informative purposes:
1/ COM1
This bus allows synchronization, load sharing (active and reactive), dead bus management, automatic
load/unload, Broadcast data...
This isolated communication port is also used for MASTER 2.0 communication. GENSYS 2.0 Core uses a
proprietary protocol.
2/ COM2
This bus is used for communication with CANopen remote I/O modules (Beckhoff, Wago...) or J1939 engine
communication.
3/ COM3
On GENSYS 2.0 Core with firmware v1.xx, this port is used for computer connection (USB).
On GENSYS 2.0 Core with firmware v2.00 or later, this port is not used anymore. It is replaced by Ethernet
communication.


Figure 82 Com ports


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

172

4/ COM4
The modules are designed to work with independent remote display module RDM 2.0 screens which are
connected by Ethernet.
Ethernet connection to GENSYS 2.0 Core with firmware v2.00 or later.
Not used on GENSYS 2.0 Core with firmware v1.xx.
5/ COM5
MODBUS speed [E1441]: the following speeds are available: 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.
8 data bits. No parity. 1 stop bit. Isolated. 2 wires.
Modbus address [E1634]: this parameter is used to define the GENSYS 2.0 Core Modbus SLAVE (RTU) address.
6/ COM6
COM6 is the memory card port. No settings on this com port.

13.6.6 Serial number/Software version
This is the same item as Display in the first level menu.

13.6.7 Level -1 password menu
Option select *E1610+: this can be Meters preset, G59, or None (default). See chapter 9.10 for
details.

13.6.8 GENSYS 2.0 to PC file
This menu is only displayed on the computer and not on the GENSYS 2.0 Core front panel.
Download.
By selecting Download GENSYS 2.0Core _file.txt, the current configuration file will be displayed in your
internet browser.
Use the File / Save as... menu of your browser to save this file.









Warning:
If you use the text file to edit a new configuration, it is strongly recommended that you use the
text file uploaded from the GENSYS 2.0 Core, modify it, and download this new text file to the
GENSYS 2.0 Core. Always use a text file compatible with the installed firmware version.

Warning:
File transfer is only possible when engine is stopped.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

173

13.6.9 PC to GENSYS 2.0 Core file
This menu is only displayed on the computer and not on the GENSYS 2.0 Core front panel.
NOTE:
We recommend you first save the current configuration using the GENSYS 2.0 Core to PC file menu before
making changes.
File transfer is only possible when engine is stopped.
Use the "browse" button to select your file, then choose the "Save" button.
When the operation is completed, a screen will appear showing:

Figure 83 Compilation result screen

13.6.10 Download logo
This menu is only displayed on the computer and not on the GENSYS 2.0 Core front panel.
This menu allows you to change the screen saver logo on the GENSYS 2.0 Core front panel.
NOTE:
File transfer is only possible when engine is stopped.
The picture must be a monochromatic BMP file of 74*52 pixels.
Use the "browse" button to select your file, then choose the "Save" button.
When the operation is completed, a screen will appear showing:

Figure 84 Download screen

13.7 Dedicated screens
Access to the Information page.
Access to the Alarms page.
Access to the Faults page.
Click BACK on your internet browser or press the button a second time to return to your previous screen.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

174

13.7.1 Alarms
At any time and any level, you can click on the "Alarms" link in your browser or press the [ALARM] key on the
front panel.
By pressing "<<" or ">>", you can change between 1
st
to 10
th
alarms and 11
th
to 20
th
alarms...etc. 50 alarms are
visible.
Pressing "Refresh" will update the screen with last occurred alarm(s).
Pressing "Reset" will reset the protection(s) which were triggered.

NOTE:
The condition triggering the protection must first be corrected before resetting the alarm; failing to do this will
trigger the protection again.
The Alarm archive can be deleted in the System/ Date Time meter/. Data logging --reset menu.

13.7.2 Faults
At any time and any level, you can click on the "Faults" link on your browser or press the [FAULT] key on
the front panel. Click BACK on your internet browser or press the button a second time to return to your
previous screen.
This will automatically change the display and show the faults screen.
The last 50 faults are displayed as follows:
dd/mm/yy hh:mn:ss protec. label XXXX=On (or Off). XXXX stands for the variable number.

The Faults archive can be deleted in the System/ Date Time meter/. Data logging --reset menu.

Figure 85 Fault screen

13.7.3 Information
At any time and any level, you can click the "Information" link on your browser or press the [ i ] key on the
front panel. Choose BACK on your internet browser or press the button a second time to return to your
previous screen.
This will automatically change the display and show the information screen.
GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

M
e
n
u

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w

175


Figure 86 Information screen

Power [E2071]: This will display the current status of the GENSYS 2.0 Core regarding power management. It
will also display a state code which is dedicated to the technical support team of your local GENSYS 2.0
Core Distributor.
Engine [E2057]: This will display the current status of GENSYS 2.0 Core regarding the engine. It will also
display a state code which is dedicated to the technical support team of your local GENSYS 2.0 Core
Distributor.
Parameter information: You can display any parameter by simply giving its variable number. By doing so,
you can customize your information screen and display 10 parameters per page (5 pages available). Please
refer to the technical documentation for list of variable numbers.


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

U
s
e
f
u
l

I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

176

14 Useful Information
This page gives access to useful information concerning different areas of the GENSYS 2.0 Core unit's
functioning.
14.1.1 Speed Regulation details

Figure 87 Speed regulation details

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

U
s
e
f
u
l

I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

177

14.1.2 Voltage Regulation details

Figure 88 Voltage regulation details
15 Variables

All GENSYS 2.0 Core variables are listed in an EXCEL file (A53 Z1 9 0030x.xls) available on CRE technology
Web site (http://www.cretechnology.com ). This file contains all defined parameters and labels in all
languages handled by GENSYS 2.0 Core. The file also contains the history of all different versions of GENSYS 2.0
Core firmware.


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official Technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
e
c
a
u
t
i
o
n
s

179

16 Precautions



Change over and paralleling with mains:
For safety reasons, breakers must be equipped with an independent paralleling safety relay to
prevent failure of the automatic sequence, as shown in Figure 89 - Several generators warning and
Figure 90 - One generator with mains warning.

SYNCH
CHECK
RELAY
SYN
GENSYS
E5-E6
SYN
+24V
GENSYS
E5-E6
+24V
G1 G2
SYNCH
CHECK
RELAY
Gen.
ref
vol t
Bus
ref
vol t
Gen.
ref
vol t
Bus
ref
vol t

Figure 89 - Several generators warning

G
Mains
SYNCH
CHECK
RELAY
SYN
GENSYS
E2-E3
SYN
Generator
breaker NC
feedback
Mains breaker
NC feedback
+24V
GENSYS
E5-E6
+24V
Mains
ref
volt
Gen.
ref
volt

Figure 90 - One generator with mains warning
C2S product is the
good solution as
SYNC CHECK RELAY
(see accessories
below)

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official Technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

P
r
e
c
a
u
t
i
o
n
s

180


Warning:
When you use the virtual digital input in this way: "Generator electrical fault", "Mains electrical
Fault", "External alarm", "External fault (Soft shut down)" or "External security (Hard shut
down)", NEVER use the "Normally Open" or "Normally Close" directions but ALWAYS "Normally
Open Wired Or" or "Normally Close Wired Or".


Warning:
Manual breaker opening.
When an external security device opens the breaker, the order has to be latched. GENSYS 2.0
Core needs the feedback.




Warning:
When a power plant has several generators, even if only one generator has a GENSYS 2.0 Core,
the number of generators (E1147) must be equal or above 2. If it is 1, you may seriously damage
your generator.

Warning:
The engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover should be equipped with an over speed (over
temperature, or overpressure, where applicable) shutdown device that operates independently
from the prime mover control device.

CAUTION:
When a power plant has several generators, each GENSYS 2.0 Core must have a different
number ("Genset number" variable: E1179). If two have the same number, there is no conflict
but there will be some operating problems.

GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official Technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
s

181

17 References
A53Z1 Standard product reference.
Full reference follows this format: A53Z1-L00xx with xx depending on factory installed options.
Standard product is A53Z1-L0001.
Consult your dealer for complete reference.
17.1 Options
Each of the following options can be selected and is password activated: contact your dealer for procedure.

OPT2: Mains paralleling option for single generator paralleled with the mains. The most important
paralleling functions are:

Phase shift
ROCOF
power management (command mode, peak shaving)

OPT5: Disable paralleling function.
OPT8: Transformer phase shift compensation (HV, Dyn11 )

A watchdog option is also available using the C5 output. This option must be specified upon ordering your
unit so that CRE Technology can activate it.


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official Technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
s

182

17.2 Accessories

A53W0 USB/B GENSYS 2.0 Core to PC cable 3 m.
A40W8 DB9/DB9 - CAN inter GENSYS 2.0 cable for 2 generators - 7m.
A40W6 DB9/free wires - CAN inter GENSYS 2.0 cable for more than 2 generators or CANopen I/O
modules - 7m.
A40W3 DB9/Terminals connector to be used with more than 2 generators for double connection (with
screws).
A40W4 Free wire both sides - Communication cable (RS485, CAN, RS232) - Price per meter. Length on
request.
A53X0 Manual GENSYS 2.0 Core test bench.
A09Tx GCR: digital mains controller (ref A09T0 for 100 VAC, A09T1 for 230 VAC, and A09T2 for 400
VAC).
A24Zx CPA: active power converter (A24Z0 for 100 VAC / 5 A, A24Z1 for 230 VAC / 5 A, A24Z2 for
400 VAC / 5 A, A24Z3 for 100 VAC / 1 A, A24Z4 for 230 VAC / 1 A, A24Z5 for 400 VAC / 1 A).
A61Y1 BSDPlus: remote management box (GPRS, email, SMS )
A25Z0 C2S is an Auto Synchronizer and Safety Column to control the paralleling of two alternating
power sources.




Figure 91 - Standard cables


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official Technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
R
E

T
E
C
H
N
O
L
O
G
Y

183

18 CRE TECHNOLOGY

130, Alle Victor Naudin
Zone des Templiers
Sophia-Antipolis
06410 Biot
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0)4 92 38 86 82
Fax: +33 (0)4 92 38 86 83
Website: www.cretechnology.com
Email: info@cretechnology.com

Technical support: +33 (0)4 92 38 86 86 (office hours: 8.30AM-12AM / 2PM-6PM)
Email: support@cretechnology.com
SKYPE: support-cretechnology.com

SARL au Capital de 300.000 Euros - RCS Antibes: 7488 625 000 15 NTVA FR54 488 625 583



Figure 92 - Access to CRE Technology


GENSYS 2.0 Core CRE Technology Official Technical documentation
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

:

C
R
E

T
E
C
H
N
O
L
O
G
Y

184

Found our entire distributors list into the world, www.cretechnology.com tab DISTRIBUTEURS













Figure 93 - CRE Technology distributors

CRE Technology retains all copyrights in any text, graphic images, and software owned by CRE Technology
and hereby authorizes you to electronically copy documents published herein solely for the purpose of
transmitting or viewing the information.


Head Office:
FRANCE

Official
Distributors

Agents

S-ar putea să vă placă și